Samsung Multifunction Printer Scx5639fr User Manual

SCX-483x Series  
SCX-563x Series  
SCX-573x Series  
User’s Guide  
Basic  
imagine the possibilities  
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and  
troubleshooting on windows  
3
Contents  
143 Regulatory information  
157 Copyright  
Key benefits  
- For duplex printing, 15 ppm (A4) or 16 ppm (Letter).  
SCX-563x Series or SCX-573x Series:  
Environmentally friendly  
- For single-side printing, 35 ppm (A4) or 37 ppm (Letter).  
- For duplex printing, 17 ppm (A4) or 18 ppm (Letter).  
Convenience  
• To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature.  
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of  
paper (see Advanced Guide).  
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-  
sided printing) (see Advanced Guide).  
• Printing Status (or Smart Panel) is a program that monitors and  
informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to customize the  
machine’s settings (see Advanced Guide).  
• To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity  
by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.  
• AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print  
Fast high resolution printing  
the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you  
use the ordinary program (see Advanced Guide).  
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi effective  
output.  
• Fast, on-demand printing.  
SCX-483x Series:  
- For single-side printing, 31 ppm (A4) or 33 ppm (Letter).  
   
Key benefits  
Wide range of functionality and application support  
• Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential” (see Advanced Guide).  
• Print posters: The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the multiple sheets of paper and can then  
be taped together to form a poster (see Advanced Guide).  
• You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on page 138).  
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.  
Expand your machine’s capacity  
• This machine has an extra memory slot for adding more memory (see "Available accessories" on page 92).  
• Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 (PS) enables PS printing.  
• Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3  
• ©1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved. Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are trademarks of Zoran  
Corporation.  
• 136 PS3 fonts  
• Contains UFST and Micro from Mono Imaging Inc.  
Features by models  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.  
SCX-4833FD  
SCX-4835FD  
SCX-4833HD  
SCX-5637FR  
SCX-5639FR  
SCX-5637HR  
SCX-4833FR  
SCX-4835FR  
SCX-5737FW  
SCX-5739FW  
Features  
Print, Copy, Scan, Fax  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0  
IEEE 1284 Parallel  
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN  
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN  
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN  
Eco printing  
Duplex (2-sided) printing  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Memory  
Tray 2 (520 sheets)  
SyncThru™ Web Service  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Dual Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
( : Included, : Optional, Blank: Not available)  
   
Useful to know  
A paper jam has occurred.  
Where can I download the machine’s driver?  
• Open and close the front door.  
• Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this  
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing  
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?  
Printouts are blurry.  
• Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.  
• Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/  
region to view product service information.  
• The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner  
cartridge.  
• Try a different print resolution setting.  
• Replace the toner cartridge.  
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.  
• Turn the product off and on again.  
The machine does not print.  
• Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual  
• Open the print queue list and remove the document from  
• Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the  
• Select your machine as your default machine in your  
Windows.  
   
1. Introduction  
9
About this user’s guide  
1
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding  
of the machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.  
Conventions  
ꢀ  
Read the safety information before using the machine.  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the  
troubleshooting chapter.  
Document is synonymous with original.  
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
Machine refers to printer or MFP.  
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary  
chapter.  
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine  
depending on its options or model you purchased.  
2
General icons  
ꢀ  
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows  
7.  
SCX-4833FD, SCX-4833HD and SCX-4835FD are the same series  
machine. This User’s Guide is written on the basis of SCX-4833FD.  
Icon  
Text  
Description  
Gives users information to protect the  
Caution machine from possible mechanical damage  
or malfunction.  
SCX-4833FR and SCX-4835FR are the same series machine. This  
User’s Guide is written on the basis of SCX-4833FR.  
SCX-5637FR, SCX-5637HR and SCX-5639FR are the same series  
machine. This User’s Guide is written on the basis of SCX-5637FR.  
Provides additional information or detailed  
Note  
specification of the machine function and  
feature.  
SCX-5737FW and SCX-5739FW are the same series machine. This  
User’s Guide is written on the basis of SCX-5737FW.  
       
1. Introduction  
10  
Safety information  
4
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to  
you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to your  
machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions  
before using the machine. After reading this section, keep it in a safe  
place for future reference.  
Operating environment  
ꢀ  
Warning  
3
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the  
electrical outlet is not grounded.  
Important safety symbols  
ꢀ  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter  
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water,  
small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in  
Warning  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
severe personal injury or death.  
• If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke,  
makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor,  
immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the  
machine.  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in  
Caution  
minor personal injury or property damage.  
Do not attempt.  
• The user should be able to access the power outlet in  
case of emergencies that might require the user to pull  
the plug out.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.  
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by  
a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire.  
     
1. Introduction  
11  
Safety information  
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not  
handle the plug with wet hands.  
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone  
or PC interface cords.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to  
your pet.  
If the machine does not operate properly after these  
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine  
from all interface connections and request assistance  
from qualified service personnel.  
Caution  
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-  
operation, remove the power plug from the electrical  
outlet.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
5
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Operating method  
ꢀ  
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.  
Burns could occur.  
Caution  
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet  
appears damaged, unplug the machine from all  
interface connections and request assistance from  
qualified service personnel.  
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.  
It can cause damage to the machine.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do  
not attempt to force it in.  
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine  
and paper tray.  
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this  
could result in electric shock.  
You may get injured.  
1. Introduction  
12  
Safety information  
6
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation  
opening.  
Installation / Moving  
ꢀ  
This could result in elevated component temperatures  
which can cause damage or fire.  
Warning  
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed  
paper.  
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity,  
or water leaks.  
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.  
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the  
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to  
touch.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Burns can occur.  
Caution  
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or  
sharp metal objects.  
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and  
disconnect all cords.  
It can damage the machine.  
Then lift the machine:  
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper  
output tray.  
• If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with  
1 person.  
It can damage the machine.  
• If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18  
lbs), lift with 2 people.  
This machine's power rception device is the power cord.  
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord  
from the electrical outlet.  
• If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift  
with 4 or more people.  
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine  
damage.  
1. Introduction  
13  
Safety information  
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.  
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe  
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2  
meters (6 feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge  
should be 16 AWG or larger.  
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine  
damage.  
The machine should be connected to  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and  
could result in electric shock or fire.  
the power level which is specified on the label.  
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you  
are using, contact the electrical utility company.  
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge  
a
7
Use only No.26 AWG or larger, telephone line cord, if  
necessary.  
Maintenance / Checking  
ꢀ  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.  
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an  
airtight location, such as a closet.  
Caution  
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in  
fire.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before  
cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the  
machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not  
spray water directly into the machine.  
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded  
electrical outlet.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
When you are working inside the machine replacing  
supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the  
machine.  
This can diminish performance, and could result in  
electric shock or fire.  
You could get injured.  
1. Introduction  
14  
Safety information  
8
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the  
plug clean from dust or water.  
Supply usage  
ꢀ  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
Caution  
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened  
with screws.  
The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung  
service technician.  
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.  
Children could get hurt.  
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge  
or fuser unit.  
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by  
yourself.  
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.  
When changing the toner cartridge or removing  
jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch  
your body or clothes.  
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician  
when the machine needs repairing.  
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the  
user's guide provided with the machine.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep  
them away from children.  
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause  
damage to the machine.  
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a  
service fee will be charged.  
1. Introduction  
15  
Safety information  
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water  
to wash it.  
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.  
1. Introduction  
16  
Machine overview  
Machine overview  
9
Accessories  
ꢀ  
Power cord  
Quick installation guide  
a
b
Software CD  
Handset  
c
Misc. accessories  
a. The software CD contains the printer driver and applications.  
b. SCX-4833HD and SCX-5637HR only.  
c. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific  
model.  
   
1. Introduction  
17  
Machine overview  
1. Introduction  
18  
Machine overview  
10  
Front view  
ꢀ  
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.  
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.  
1
2
17  
18  
14  
3
4
13  
12  
15  
19  
20  
11  
10  
5
6
16  
7
9
8
1 Document feeder cover  
6
7
8
9
Control board cover 11 Multi-purpose tray  
Handle 12 Output tray  
Paper level indicator 13 Control panel  
Tray 2 (optional) 14 Multi-purpose tray paper extension  
16 Output support  
17 Scanner lid  
18 Scanner glass  
19 USB port  
2 Document feeder width guide  
3 Document feeder input tray  
4 Document feeder output tray  
 
1. Introduction  
19  
Machine overview  
5 Front cover  
10 Tray 1  
15 Paper width guides on a multi-purpose tray 20 Handset  
1. Introduction  
20  
Machine overview  
11  
Rear view  
ꢀ  
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.  
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.  
1
11  
2
10  
3
4
5
6
9
7
8
1 EDI port  
4 IEEE 1284 parallel connector (optional)  
5 Power-switch  
7
8
9
Duplex unit  
Rear cover  
10 Telephone line socket  
11 Extension telephone socket (EXT)  
2 Network port  
3 USB port  
6 Power receptacle  
Tray back cover  
 
1. Introduction  
21  
Control panel overview  
This control panel may differ from your machine depending  
on its model. There are various s of control panels.  
   
1. Introduction  
22  
Control panel overview  
12  
Type A  
ꢀ  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11  
12  
13  
19  
18  
17  
6
16  
15  
14  
20  
1
Darkness  
ID Copy  
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark  
images.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver’s license on a single side of paper.  
Display screen Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation.  
Copy  
Fax  
Switches to Copy mode.  
Switches to Fax mode.  
Left/Right Arrows Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values.  
Menu  
OK  
Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus.  
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters.  
                 
1. Introduction  
23  
Control panel overview  
10  
Address Book  
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers and email addresses or search for stored fax numbers or email  
addresses.  
11  
12  
13  
Redial/Pause  
Stop/Clear  
Power  
Redials the last number in ready mode, or inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit mode.  
Stops an operations at any time.  
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off,  
press this button for more than three seconds. You can also turn the power on, or wake up the machine from power  
save mode by pressing this button.  
14  
15  
16  
Status LED  
Start  
Starts a job.  
On Hook Dial  
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker  
phone.  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Back  
Scan  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
Switches to Scan mode.  
Eco  
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage (see "Eco options" on page 68).  
Direct USB  
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of  
your machine.  
                     
1. Introduction  
24  
Control panel overview  
13  
Type B  
ꢀ  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
18  
17  
16 6  
15  
14  
13  
20 19  
1
Darkness  
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark  
images.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ID Copy  
Allows you to coy both sides the ID card like a driver’s license to a single side of paper.  
Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.  
Copy  
Fax  
Activates Copy mode.  
Activates Fax mode.  
Arrows  
OK  
Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values.  
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters.  
               
1. Introduction  
25  
Control panel overview  
9
Address Book  
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers and email addresses or search for stored fax numbers or email  
addresses.  
10  
11  
12  
Redial/Pause  
Stop/Clear  
Power  
Redials the last number in ready mode, or inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit mode.  
Stops an operations at any time.  
Turn the power on or off, or wake up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press  
this button for more than three seconds. You can also turn the power on, or wake up the machine from power save  
mode by pressing this button.  
13  
14  
15  
Status LED  
Start  
Starts a job.  
On Hook Dial  
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker  
phone.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Back  
Menu  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus.  
Activates Scan mode.  
Scan  
Eco  
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage (see "Eco options" on page 68).  
Direct USB  
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of  
your machine.  
                       
1. Introduction  
26  
Control panel overview  
14  
Type C  
ꢀ  
1
2
3
4
5
11 10  
9
8
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.  
Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters.  
Clear  
Stop  
Deletes characters in the edit area.  
Stops an operations at any time.  
Power  
Turn the power on or off, or wake up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press  
this button for more than three seconds. You can also turn the power on, or wake up the machine from power save  
mode by pressing this button.  
6
7
8
Wireless LED  
Status  
Starts a job.  
Start  
               
1. Introduction  
27  
Control panel overview  
9
On Hook Dial  
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker  
phone.  
10  
11  
Help  
Gives detailed information about this machine’s menus or status.  
Resets the current machine’s setup.  
Reset  
     
1. Introduction  
28  
Turning on the machine  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.  
1
Turn the power switch on.  
2
   
1. Introduction  
29  
Installing the driver locally  
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your  
computer using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network,  
skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network  
connected machine’s driver (see Advanced Guide).  
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents  
your CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
Select Install Now.  
3
• If you are a Macintosh, Linux, or Unix OS user, refer to the  
Advanced guide.  
• The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ  
depending on the machine and interface in use.  
• Selecting Advanced Installation > Custom Installation  
allows you to choose which programs to install.  
• Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).  
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms  
of the License Agreement. Then, click Next.  
15  
4
5
Windows  
ꢀ  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the  
installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
Click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.  
   
1. Introduction  
30  
Reinstalling the driver  
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to  
reinstall the driver.  
16  
Windows  
ꢀ  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >  
Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
3
4
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the  
   
2. Menu overview and basic  
setup  
This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and  
the basic setup options.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
32  
Menu overview  
1
For SCX-4833FD, press the left/right arrows until the needed  
menu item appears and press OK.  
3
SCX-4833FD,SCX-4833FR,SCX-5637FR  
ꢀ ꢀ  
For SCX-4833FR / SCX-5637FR, press the up/down arrows  
until the needed menu item appears and press OK.  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the  
machine or use the machine’s functions.  
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.  
4
5
• An asterisk (*) appears next to the currently selected  
menu.  
For SCX-4833FD, press the left/right arrows to aceess the  
required value.  
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your  
machine.  
For SCX-4833FR / SCX-5637FR, press the up/down arrows  
to aceess the required value.  
• Some menu names may differ from your machine  
depending on its options or the models.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
6
7
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to the ready mode.  
Accessing the menu  
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel  
depending on the feature to be used.  
1
Select  
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the  
2
bottom line of the display and press OK.  
       
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
33  
Menu overview  
SCX-4833FD  
Items  
Options  
Copy Feature Scan Size  
Items  
Options  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Fax Feature Darkness  
Contrast  
Duplex  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Original  
Layout  
Resolution  
Scan Size  
Multi Send  
Delay Send  
Priority Send  
Forward  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Margin Shift  
Copy Setup Change Default  
Secure Receive  
Add Page  
Scan Feature USB Feature  
E-mail Feature  
Cancel Job  
Scan Setup  
Print Setup  
Change Default  
Fax Setup  
Sending  
Orientation  
Copies  
Receiving  
Change Default  
Auto Report  
Resolution  
Darkness  
Darken Text  
Emulation  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
34  
Menu overview  
SCX-4833FR/SCX-5637FR  
Items  
Options  
System Setup Machine Setup  
Paper Setup  
Items  
Options  
Fax Feature Darkness  
Contrast  
Sound/Volume  
Report  
Resolution  
Scan Size  
Maintenance  
Clear Setting  
Duplex  
Job Management  
Multi Send  
Delay Send  
Priority Send  
Forward  
Network  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
Ethernet Speed  
802.1x  
Secure Receive  
Add Page  
Clear Setting  
Network Conf.  
Cancel Job  
Fax Setup  
Sending  
Receiving  
Change Default  
Auto Report  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
35  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Copy Feature Scan Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Duplex  
Print Setup  
Orientation  
Copies  
Resolution  
Darkness  
Darken Text  
Emulation  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Original  
Layout  
System Setup Machine Setup  
Paper Setup  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Margin Shift  
Edge Erase  
Sound/Volume  
Report  
Copy Setup Change Default  
Maintenance  
Clear Setting  
Scan Feature USB Feature  
E-mail Feature  
Job Manage  
Image Overwrite  
FTP Feature  
SMB Feature  
Network  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
Ethernet Speed  
802.1x  
Scan Setup  
Change Default  
Send Report  
Clear Setting  
Network Configuration  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
36  
Menu overview  
Accessing the menu  
Items  
Options  
Document Box Doc Box Feature  
Press the menu you want to use on the touch screen.  
1
2
Shared Folder Feature  
Doc Box Setup  
Press  
to return to the ready mode.  
Shared Folder Setup  
Doc Box Report  
Copy  
Custom  
Items  
Basic Copy  
Options  
2
Darkness  
SCX-5737FW  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Contrast  
Original Type  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the  
machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be  
accessed by pressing the icon on the touch screen.  
• An asterisk (*) appears next to the currently selected  
menu.  
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your  
machine.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
37  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Custom Copy Duplex  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Darkness  
Collate Copy Duplex  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Contrast  
Original Size  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Tray  
Original Type  
N-up Copy  
Duplex  
Darkness  
Layout  
Contrast  
Adjust Background  
Margin Shift  
Edge Erase  
Original Size  
Original Type  
N-up  
ID Copy  
Auto Fit  
Darkness  
Original Orientation  
Contrast  
Clone Copy  
Book Copy  
Darkness  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Contrast  
Original Type  
Darkness  
Darkness  
Auto Fit Copy Contrast  
Original Type  
Contrast  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Book Copy  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
38  
Menu overview  
Fax  
Items  
Options  
Poster Copy Darkness  
Contrast  
Items  
Manual Send To  
Darkness  
Options  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Contrast  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Booklet  
Duplex  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Booklet  
On Hook Dial To  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Original Type  
Original Size  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
39  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Delayed Send To  
Darkness  
SpeedDial  
Send  
To  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Contrast  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Priority Send To  
Darkness  
Group Dial  
Send  
To  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Contrast  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Original Size  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
40  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Redial  
To  
Network PC Destination  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Scan Color  
Scan Format  
Duplex  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Original Size  
Send Email  
To  
Scan  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Duplex  
Items  
Options  
Local PC  
Destination  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Duplex  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Original Size  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
41  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
SMB  
Destination  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Color Mode  
Resolution  
File Format  
Duplex  
Custom Email To  
Subject  
From  
CC  
BCC  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Duplex  
Darkness  
Contrast  
FTP  
Destination  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Duplex  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Darkness  
Contrast  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
42  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
USB  
Original Type  
Original Size  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Name  
File Format  
Duplex  
Shared Boxes Original Size  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Name  
File Format  
Duplex  
Darkness  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Contrast  
File Policy  
File Policy  
WSD  
Document Box Original Size  
Resolution  
Eco  
Color Mode  
File Name  
Items  
Options  
File Format  
Duplex  
Eco-On  
On  
Off  
Darkness  
Settings  
Default Mode  
Contrast  
Feature Configuration  
File Policy  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
43  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Preview  
Copy  
Address Book PhoneBook  
Simulator  
Box Print  
PC Driver Print  
Email  
Print  
Reset  
Machine Setup  
Items  
Options  
Default  
Setting  
Copy Default  
Scan Default  
Fax Default  
Paper Setup Tray1  
Tray2  
MP Tray  
Margin  
Tray  
Behaviour  
Auto Tray Switch  
Paper Substitution  
Auto Continue  
Paper Mismatch  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
44  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Reports  
All Report  
Fax Setup  
Forward  
Toll Save  
Configuration  
Supplies Information  
Address Book  
Fax Send  
Junk Fax Setup  
Secure Receive  
Prefix Dial  
Fax Sent  
Stmp Rcvd Name  
ECM Mode  
Fax Received  
Fax Schedule Jobs  
JunkFax  
Modem Speed  
Document Box Saving  
Image TCR  
Network Configuration  
Local User Authentication  
PCL Font  
Setup Wizard  
Email Setup SMTP Server  
Send to Self  
PS Font  
Network User Authentication  
Usage Counter  
Fax Options  
Default To Address  
Default From  
Default Subject  
Stored Jobs  
Completed Jobs  
Account  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
45  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Network Setup Ethernet Speed  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
Initial Setup Machine ID  
Select Country  
Language  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
802.1x  
Date&Time  
Ethernet Active  
Http Active  
Clock Mode  
Sound/Volume  
Power Save  
Wireless  
Clear Settings  
Wakeup Event  
System Timeout  
Import Setting  
Export Setting  
Toner Status Alert  
CLR Empty Msg.  
Toner Save  
Print Setup  
Orientation  
Copies  
Resolution  
Darkness  
Darken Text  
Emulation  
Select Tray  
Job Timeout  
Altitude Adjustment  
Auto CR  
Firmware Version  
AutoComplete  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
46  
Menu overview  
USB  
Items  
Options  
Restore  
Options  
Printer Setup  
Paper Setup  
Tray Behaviour  
Copy Default  
Fax Default  
Items  
Print From  
Options  
File Navigation  
Auto Fit  
Copies  
Duplex  
Scan Default  
Sent Report  
Rcvd Report  
Select Tray  
Scan to USB Original  
Original Size  
Maintenance Fax Line Test  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Name  
File Format  
Duplex  
Troubleshooti Quick Reference Guide  
ng  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Language  
Darkness  
Contrast  
File Policy  
File Manage File Navigation  
Delete  
Format  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
47  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Options  
Show Space  
Directory  
Items  
PhoneBook View List  
Search  
Add  
Group Registration  
Print  
Reset  
Email  
View List  
Search  
Add  
Group Registration  
Print  
Reset  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
48  
Changing the display language  
To change the language that is displayed on the control panel,  
follow these steps:  
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup >  
1
Language on the control panel.  
Or select Machine Setup > Initial Setup > Language on the  
touch screen.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level  
menus for some models.  
Select the language you want to display on the control panel.  
2
3
Press OK to save the selection.  
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
49  
Media and tray  
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into  
your machine.  
1
2
• Using print media that does not meet these specifications  
may cause problems or require repairs. Such repairs are  
not covered by Samsung’s warranty or service  
agreements.  
1 Paper length guide  
2 Paper width guide  
• Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this  
machine. It could cause damage to the machine.  
The duplex unit is preset to Letter/LGL or A4 size, depending on your  
country. To change the paper size, adjust the guide as shown below.  
• Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.  
• Use designated print media (see "Print media  
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the  
printer may lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases  
may cause a fire.  
3
Tray overview  
ꢀ ꢀ  
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.  
       
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
50  
Media and tray  
The paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in  
the tray.  
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper  
registration, image skew, or jamming of the paper.  
1
2
A4  
1 Full  
2 Empty  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
51  
Media and tray  
4
Slide the paper length guide until it lightly touches the end of  
the paper stack.  
4
5
Loading paper in the tray/optional tray  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Pull out the paper tray.  
1
2
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages  
before loading papers.  
Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the  
paper stack without causing it to bend.  
Place paper with the side you want to print on facing down.  
3
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
52  
Media and tray  
5
• Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the  
Loading in multi-purpose tray  
ꢀ ꢀ  
media to warp.  
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause  
paper jams.  
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and s of print material,  
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media  
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray  
• Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause  
a paper jam or the paper can be wrinkled.  
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing  
when there is still paper in the multi-purpose tray.  
• Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge  
going into the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the  
center of the tray.  
• To ensure printing quality and to prevent paper jams, only  
load the available paper (see "Print media specifications"  
Insert the tray back into the machine.  
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before  
loading them into the multi-purpose tray.  
6
7
Set the paper and size for tray 1 (see "Setting the paper size  
• When printing on special media, you must follow the  
• When papers overlap when printing using the multi-  
purpose tray, open tray 1 and remove the papers then try  
printing again.  
• When paper does not feed well while printing, push the  
paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically.  
       
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
53  
Media and tray  
Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose  
tray extension, as shown.  
Adjust the multi-purpose tray paper width guides to the width  
of the paper.  
1
2
3
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages  
before loading paper.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
54  
Media and tray  
Load the paper. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width  
guides and adjust them to the width of the paper.  
4
• When using special media, we recommend you feed one  
Printing the special media (Face up)  
If special media are printed out with curl, wrinkles, crease,  
or black bold lines, open the rear cover and try printing  
again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing.  
Set the paper and size from the control panel (see "Setting the  
5
6
Printing on special media  
ꢀ ꢀ  
To see for paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media  
The table below shows the special media usable in each tray.  
Optional  
The media s are shown in the Printing Preferences. Select the  
proper media to get the highest printing quality.  
s
Tray 1  
Multi-purpose tray  
tray  
Plain  
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
55  
Media and tray  
Envelope  
Optional  
tray  
s
Tray 1  
Multi-purpose tray  
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the  
envelopes.  
Thick  
Thicker  
Thin  
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.  
Bond  
Color  
CardStock  
Labels  
Transparency  
Envelope  
Preprinted  
Cotton  
Recycled  
Archive  
If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, creases, or black bold  
lines, open the rear cover and pull down the pressure lever on the  
right side about 90 degrees and try printing again. Keep the rear  
cover opened during printing.  
( : Included, Blank: Not available)  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
56  
Media and tray  
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the  
way to the corner of the envelope.  
1 Acceptable  
2 Unacceptable  
1
1 Pressure lever  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one  
flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with  
the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C  
(338 °F)). The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling,  
creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.  
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:  
-
Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise; jams may  
occur.  
-
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and  
should not contain air.  
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm  
from the edges of the envelope.  
-
-
Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.  
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.  
Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the  
machine during operation.  
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-  
creased folds.  
Do not use stamped envelopes.  
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining,  
self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.  
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
57  
Media and tray  
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to  
prolonged sunlight.  
Transparency  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed  
for use in laser printers.  
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any  
torn edges.  
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.  
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let  
the printed sheets stack up as they are being printed out.  
Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by  
Xerox, such as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter)  
Must withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.  
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the  
machine.  
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long.  
Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty  
printing.  
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them  
carefully.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
58  
Media and tray  
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other  
indications of separation.  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in  
laser printers.  
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between  
labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing,  
which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause  
damage to machine components.  
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than  
once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass  
through the machine.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or  
are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.  
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:  
-
-
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing  
temperature. Check your machine’s specifications to view the  
fusing temperature (about 170°C (338°F)).  
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing  
between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces  
between the labels, causing serious jams.  
Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any  
direction.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
59  
Media and tray  
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper  
Preprinted paper  
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up  
with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with  
paper feeding, turn the paper around. Note that print quality is not  
guaranteed.  
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm  
(0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material.  
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt,  
vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the  
machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C  
(338°F)).  
Must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine  
rollers.  
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
60  
Media and tray  
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper  
is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted  
paper, reducing print quality.  
• The settings set from the machine driver override the  
settings on the control panel.  
a To print from an application, open an application and  
start the print menu.  
7
b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing  
Setting the paper size and  
ꢀ ꢀ  
c Press the Paper tab and select an appropriate paper .  
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and using  
the control panel buttons.  
• If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing  
paper, select the Paper tab > Size > Edit... and set  
Custom Paper Size Settings in the Printing Preferences  
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level  
8
menus for some models.  
Preparing originals  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper  
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or  
larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
1
Size or Paper on the control panel.  
Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Paper Setup >  
select a tray > Paper Size or Paper on the touch screen.  
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to  
prevent paper jam, low print quality and machine damage.  
-
-
-
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
Coated paper  
Select the tray and the option you want.  
2
3
Onion skin or thin paper  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Press OK to save the selection.  
       
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
61  
Media and tray  
-
Torn paper  
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
1
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is  
completely dry before loading.  
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of  
paper.  
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents  
with other unusual characteristics.  
9
Loading originals  
ꢀ ꢀ  
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an  
original for copying, scanning, and sending a fax.  
On the scanner glass  
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get  
the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images.  
Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder. If an original  
is detected in the document feeder, the machine gives it priority over  
the original on the scanner glass.  
     
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
62  
Media and tray  
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with  
the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
2
• Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get  
hurt.  
• Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The  
scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt.  
• Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while  
copying or scanning. It is harmful to eyes.  
In the document feeder  
Using the document feeder, you can load up to 50 sheets of paper  
(75 g/m2, 20 lbs bond) for one job.  
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages  
before loading originals.  
1
Close the scanner lid.  
3
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect  
copy quality and toner consumption.  
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the  
printout. Always keep it clean (see "Cleaning the machine"  
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the  
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and  
then close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than  
30 mm, start copying with the scanner lid open.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
63  
Media and tray  
Load the original face up into the document feeder. Make sure  
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size  
marked on the document input tray.  
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.  
2
3
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on  
the printout. Always keep the glass clean (see "Cleaning the  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
64  
Basic printing  
10  
The basic print settings including the number of copies and  
print range are selected within the Print window.  
4
5
Printing  
ꢀ ꢀ  
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click  
Properties or Preferences from the Print window (see  
If you are a Macintosh, Linux, or Unix OS user, refer to the  
Advanced Guide.  
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in  
Windows 7.  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.  
Open the document you want to print.  
1
2
3
Select Print from the File menu.  
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.  
     
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
65  
Basic printing  
11  
Canceling a print job  
ꢀ ꢀ  
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel  
the job as follows:  
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the  
machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar.  
You can also cancel the current job by pressing  
on the control panel.  
(Stop/Clear)  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
66  
Basic printing  
12  
Click Properties or Preferences.  
4
Opening printing preferences  
ꢀ ꢀ  
• The Printing Preferences window that appears in this  
user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use.  
• When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you  
may see a warning mark or . An mark means you  
can select that certain option but it is not recommended,  
and an mark means you cannot select that option due  
to the machine’s setting or environment.  
Open the document you want to print.  
1
2
3
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.  
Select your machine from the Select Printer.  
You can check the machine’s current status pressing the  
Printer Status button (see Advanced Guide).  
Using a favorite setting  
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except  
for the Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for  
future use.  
To save a Presets item, follow these steps:  
     
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
67  
Basic printing  
13  
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
1
2
Using help  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.  
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences  
window and press F1 on your keyboard.  
14  
Eco printing  
ꢀ ꢀ  
The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. You can  
configure Eco function to adjust your paper savings and save the  
setting you want to use.  
Click  
settings are saved.  
(Add). When you save Presets, all current driver  
3
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is  
enabled.  
Select more options and click  
(Update), settings will be  
Setting eco mode on the control panel  
added to the Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select  
it from the Presets drop-down list. The machine is now set to  
print according to the settings you have selected.  
• The settings set from the machine’s driver override the  
settings on the control panel.  
To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets drop-  
down list and click  
(Delete).  
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see  
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop-down list.  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level  
menus for some models.  
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
68  
Basic printing  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco  
Setting eco mode on the driver  
1
Settings on the control panel.  
Open the Eco tab to set eco mode. When you see the eco image  
), that means the eco mode is currently enabled.  
Or select Eco > Settings on the touch screen.  
(
Select the option you want and press OK.  
2
Eco options  
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode.  
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control  
(Duplex (long edge)/Toner save/2-up/Skip blank pages)  
panel.  
-
-
Off: Set the eco mode off.  
None: Disables eco mode.  
On: Set the eco mode on.  
Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various eco items  
you want to use.  
If you set the eco mode on with a password from the  
SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings >  
System > Eco > Settings), the On force message appears.  
You have to enter the password to change the eco mode  
status.  
Password: If the administrator fixed to enable the eco mode, you  
have to enter the password to change the status.  
Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru™  
Web Service. Before you select this item, you must set the  
eco function in SyncThru™ Web Service> Settings tab >  
Machine Settings > System > Eco > Settings.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
3
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
69  
Basic printing  
Result simulator  
Starting secure printing on the driver  
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon  
dioxide, used electricity, and the amount of saved paper in  
accordance with the settings you selected.  
Open the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing  
preferences" on page 66), and the select Advanced tab > Print Mode  
> Confidential. Enter the job name, user ID, and password. Even  
though you have started the secure printing job, the device will not  
print the document until you enter your password on the printer.  
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of  
printed paper is one hundred without a blank page when the eco  
mode is disabled.  
Referr to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and  
paper from IEA, the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and  
Communication of Japan and www.remanufactoring.org.uk.  
Each model has a different index.  
• You can use this feature after installing the optional  
memory.  
• If you did not install optional memory, you can set the  
menus as shown below:  
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average  
printing power consupmtion of this machine.  
1 From the printer’s control panel, select  
(Menu) >  
System Setup > Maintenance > Ram Disk > Enable.  
2 From a computer, select a printer from the printer list  
> right-click the printer > select Properties > Device  
Options > Properties > Storage Options. Then check  
the Ram Disk option (see "Opening printing  
The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on  
the operating system used, computing performance, application  
software, connection method, media , media size, job  
complexity, etc.  
15  
Secure printing  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Printing secure documents from the control panel  
When you use a printing device in an office, school or other public  
place, you can protect your personal documents or confidential  
information by using the secure printing feature.  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage > Stored  
1
2
Job on the printer’s control panel.  
Select the document to print.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
70  
Basic printing  
Enter the password that you set from the printer driver.  
3
4
Print or delete the document.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
71  
Basic copying  
16  
17  
Basic copy  
Changing the settings for each copy  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Select  
(copy) on the control panel.  
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can  
quickly and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the  
options for each copy, use the copy function buttons on the control  
panel.  
1
2
Or select Copy > Basic Copy on the touch screen.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder (see  
• If you press  
(Stop/Clear) while setting the copy  
options, all of the options you have set for the current copy  
job will be canceled and returned to their default status.  
Or, they will automatically return to their default status  
after the machine completes the copy in progress.  
If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/  
Enlarge, Darkness, Contrast, Original and more by using  
3
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see  
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number  
keypad, if necessary.  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level  
4
5
menus for some models.  
Press Start.  
Darkness  
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation,  
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images,  
you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.  
press  
(Stop/Clear) and the copying will stop.  
       
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
72  
Basic copying  
Select  
on the control panel.  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness  
Original  
1
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting  
the document for the current copy job.  
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >  
the touch screen.  
(settings) >Darkness on  
Select  
the control panel.  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original on  
1
Select the option you want and press OK.  
2
3
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5  
being the darkest.  
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >  
touch screen.  
(settings) > Original on the  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
2
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Contrast  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and  
photographs.  
Set this parameter to adjust the contrast between light and dark.  
Select  
the control panel.  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Contrast on  
1
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear  
texts.  
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >  
(settings) > Contrast on  
the touch screen.  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
2
3
3
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5  
being the darkest.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
73  
Basic copying  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Reduced or enlarged copy  
4
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to  
400% when you copy original documents from the scanner glass.  
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at  
the bottom of your copy.  
To select from the predefined copy sizes  
18  
Select  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/  
1
ID card copying  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Enlarge on the control panel.  
Or select Copy > Custom Copy >  
Enlarge on the touch screen.  
(settings) > Reduce/  
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.  
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the  
paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size  
of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item  
such as business card.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
2
3
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this  
feature.  
Select  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/  
1
Enlarge > Custom on the control panel.  
Or select Copy > Custom Copy >  
(settings) > Reduce/  
Enlarge > Other on the touch screen.  
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.  
2
3
Press OK to save the selection.  
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
74  
Basic copying  
Press ID Copy on the control panel.  
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where  
arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.  
1
5
6
Or select Copy > ID Copy on the touch screen.  
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner  
glass where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner  
lid.  
2
Press Start.  
Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.  
3
4
Press Start.  
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place  
Back Side and Press [Start].  
• If you do not press the Start button, only the front side will  
be copied.  
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some  
portions may not be printed.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
75  
Basic scanning  
19  
Scanning using the contorl panel  
If you see Not Available message, check the port  
connection, or select Enable Scan from Device Panel in  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Switch to advanced  
mode. > Scan to PCSettings.  
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals.  
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model.  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level  
Select the application program you want and press OK.  
3
menus for some models.  
Default setting is My Documents.  
• If you want to scan using the network, refer to the  
Advanced Guide (see Advanced Guide).  
You can add or delete the folder where the scanned file is  
saved in Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Switch to  
advanced mode. > Scan to PCSettings.  
For USB connected machine  
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
4
5
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder (see  
1
Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan  
destination to My Documents.  
• If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.  
Select  
(scan) > Scan to PC > Local PC on the control panel.  
2
Or select Scan > Local PC on the touch screen.  
Scanning begins.  
     
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
76  
• Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents  
folder.  
• You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Scan Assistant  
program (see Advanced Guide).  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
77  
Basic faxing  
Basic faxing  
20  
Preparing to fax  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied  
line cord to your telephone wall jack. Refer to the Quick Installation  
Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a  
telephone connection is different from one country to another.  
• You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet  
phone. For more information ask your internet service  
provider.  
• We recommend using traditional analog phone services  
(PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network) when  
21  
connecting telephone lines to use a fax machine. If you  
use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can  
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter.  
The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and  
improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the  
DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact  
your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.  
Sending a fax  
ꢀ ꢀ  
When you place the originals, you can use either the  
document feeder or the scanner glass. If the originals are  
placed on both the document feeder and the scanner glass,  
the machine will read the originals on the document feeder  
first, which has higher priority in scanning.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder (see  
1
2
1 Line port  
2 Micro filter  
3 DSL modem / Telephone line  
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
Or select Fax > Manual Send >  
(settings) on the touch  
screen.  
     
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
78  
Basic faxing  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs  
Or select Fax > On Hook Dial >  
screen.  
(settings) on the touch  
3
Enter the destination fax number.  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs  
4
5
3
Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan  
and send the fax to the destinations.  
Press On Hook Dial on the control panel or lift the handset.  
4
5
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control  
panel.  
• If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use  
Samsung Network PC Fax (see Advanced Guide).  
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press  
before the machine starts transmission.  
(Stop/Clear)  
Press Start on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched  
fax signal from the remote fax machine.  
6
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the  
message asking to place another page.  
Sending a fax to multiple destinations  
You can use the Multiple Send feature, which allows you to send a fax  
to multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory  
and sent to a remote station. After transmission, the originals are  
automatically erased from memory.  
Sending a fax manually  
Perform the following to send a fax using On Hook Dial on the  
control panel. If your machine is an SCX-4833HD or SCX-5637HR, you  
can send a fax using the handset.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder (see  
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder (see  
1
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
79  
Basic faxing  
Or select Fax > SpeedDial Send or Group Dial Send >  
Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot  
enter another group dial number.  
(settings) on the touch screen.  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs  
3
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at  
the Another No.? prompt and press OK.  
8
Select  
panel.  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control  
4
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you  
entered in the order in which you entered them.  
Or select Next on the touch screen.  
22  
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press  
OK.  
5
Receiving a fax  
ꢀ ꢀ  
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial  
number using the Address book button (see Advanced  
Guide).  
Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a  
fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and  
automatically receives the fax.  
Enter the second fax number and press OK.  
23  
6
7
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the  
document.  
Adjusting the document settings  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your  
original’s status to get the best quality.  
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and  
repeat steps 5 and 6. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
80  
Basic faxing  
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on  
1
2
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see  
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Manual Send, On Hook  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level  
Dial, Delayed Send, or etc. >  
the touch screen.  
(settings) > Resolution on  
menus for some models.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Resolution  
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.  
The default document settings produce good results when using  
typical text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of  
poor quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution  
to produce a higher quality fax.  
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or  
originals printed using a dot-matrix printer.  
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail.  
Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with  
which you are communicating also supports the Super  
Fine resolution.  
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To  
change the default setting (see Advanced Guide).  
• For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not  
available. The resolution setting is automatically changed  
to Fine.  
• When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and  
the fax machine with which you are communicating does  
not support Super Fine resolution, the machine transmits  
using the highest resolution mode supported by the other  
fax machine.  
 
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
81  
Color Fax: Original with colors.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
• Memory transmission is not available in this mode.  
• You can only send a color fax if the machine you are  
communicating with supports color fax reception and you  
send the fax manually.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
Darkness  
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.  
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To  
change the default setting (see Advanced Guide).  
Select  
control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the  
1
2
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Manual Send, On Hook  
Dial, Delayed Send, or etc. >  
touch screen.  
(settings) > Darkness on the  
Select a dakness level you want.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
82  
Using USB memory device  
Using USB memory device  
25  
Plugging in a USB memory device  
ꢀ ꢀ  
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your  
machine.  
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for  
USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB  
memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes.  
24  
About USB memory  
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.  
ꢀ ꢀ  
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug  
connector.  
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory  
capacities to give you more room for storing documents,  
presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution  
photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move.  
A
B
You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB  
memory device.  
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.  
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device  
Print data stored on a USB memory device  
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory  
Format the USB memory device  
Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility  
certification; otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.  
Check the available memory space  
   
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
83  
Using USB memory device  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB  
memory device.  
• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine  
is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory.  
The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by  
user’s misuse.  
• If your USB memory device has certain features such as  
security settings and password settings, your machine  
may not automatically detect it. For details about these  
features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory device.  
26  
Scanning to a USB memory device  
ꢀ ꢀ  
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level  
menus for some models.  
Scanning  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on  
your machine.  
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder (see  
2
Select  
(scan) > Scan to USB > OK on the control panel.  
3
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
84  
Using USB memory device  
Or select Scan > USB > Next > Start on the touch screen.  
File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be  
saved. When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan  
multiple pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you  
cannot select Mono in Color Mode.  
The machine begins scanning.  
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device  
from the machine.  
Duplex: Sets the duplex mode.  
Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original.  
Contrast: Sets the contrast level to scan an original.  
Customizing Scan to USB  
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each  
scanning to USB job.  
File Policy: Sets the policy to save files between  
overwirting or .renaming  
Select  
on the control panel.  
(scan) >  
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature  
1
Select the desired status you want and press OK.  
3
4
5
Or select Direct USB > Scan to USB >  
touch screen.  
(settings) on the  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Select the setting option you want appears.  
2
You can change the default scan settings. Refer to the Advanced  
Guide.  
Scan Size (Original Size): Sets the image size.  
Original Type: Sets the original document’s .  
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.  
27  
Printing from a USB memory device  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in  
this option, you cannot select JPEG in File Format.  
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can  
print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PRN and PDF files.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
85  
Using USB memory device  
File s supported by Direct Print option.  
Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the  
number.  
4
5
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are  
compatible.  
Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file.  
PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box  
when you print a document. The document will be saved as a  
PRN file, rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in  
this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory. Refer to  
the Advanced Guide to learn how to create a PRN file.  
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print  
another job.  
Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat  
from step 2.  
6
BMP: BMP Uncompressed  
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press  
OK.  
JPEG: JPEG Baseline  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
7
PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version.  
28  
To print a document from a USB memory device  
Backing up data  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on  
your machine, and then press Direct USB.  
1
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to  
power failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system  
settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device.  
Select USB print (Print From).  
2
3
Select the folder or file you want and press OK.  
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one  
or more files or folders in the selected folder.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
86  
Using USB memory device  
Select Setup Data, Address Book or Phone Book and press  
OK.  
Backing up data  
3
Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on  
your machine.  
1
Select the file you want to restore and press OK.  
4
5
Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the  
machine.  
Select  
(scan) >  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine  
2
Setup > Export Setting on the control panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup >  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Export Setting on the touch screen.  
6
29  
Select Setup Data, Address Book or Phone Book and press  
OK.  
3
4
Managing USB memory  
ꢀ ꢀ  
The data is backed up to the USB memory.  
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by  
one or all at once by reformatting the device.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Restoring data  
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device,  
files cannot be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no  
longer need the data before deleting it.  
Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is  
1
2
stored in to the USB memory port.  
Select (scan) > (Menu) > System Setup > Machine  
Setup > Import Setting on the control panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup >  
Import Setting on the touch screen.  
 
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
87  
Using USB memory device  
Deleting an image file  
Formatting a USB memory device  
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage >  
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage >  
Next > select a file >  
(settings) > Delete on the touch  
Next > select a file >  
(settings) > Format on the touch  
screen.  
screen.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on  
your machine, and then press Direct USB.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on  
your machine, and then press Direct USB.  
1
1
Select File Manage > Delete and press OK.  
Select File Manage > Format and press OK.  
2
3
2
3
4
Select the file you want to delete and press OK.  
Select Yes.  
If you see [+] in the front of a folder name, there are one or  
more files or folders in the selected folder.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Select Yes.  
Viewing the USB memory status  
4
5
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning  
and saving documents.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > Show Space >  
Next on the touch screen.  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
88  
Using USB memory device  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on  
your machine, and then press Direct USB.  
1
Select Check Space .  
2
3
4
The available memory space appears on the display.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3. Maintenance  
90  
Ordering supplies and accessories  
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and  
maintenance parts.  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you  
purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact  
information for service.  
   
3. Maintenance  
91  
Available supplies  
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the  
following s of supplies for your machine:  
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies,  
these must be purchased in the same country as the machine  
you are using. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other  
supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to  
different configurations of toner cartridges and other  
supplies according to the specific country conditions.  
a
Part name  
MLT-D205S  
Average yield  
Standard yield  
toner cartridge  
Approx. 2,000 pages  
High yield toner  
cartridge  
Approx. 5,000 pages  
MLT-D205L  
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung  
toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner.  
Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner  
cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of  
using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be  
covered under the machine’s warranty.  
Extra high yield  
Approx. 10,000 pages MLT-D205E  
b
toner cartridge  
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
b. The toner cartridge is available only SCX-5637FR, SCX-5637HR or SCX-  
5737FW.  
Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner  
cartridge’s lifespan may differ.  
   
3. Maintenance  
92  
Available accessories  
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
Accessory  
Function  
Part name  
Memory module  
Extends your machine’s memory capacity.  
• SCX-4833FD/SCX-4835FD/SCX-4833HD  
- CLP-MEM202: 256 MB  
• SCX-4833FR/SCX-4835FR  
SCX-563x Series/SCX-573x Series  
- ML-MEM170: 512 MB  
Tray 2  
If you are experiencing frequent paper supply • SCX-4833FD/FR/5637FR/5737FW  
problems, you can attach an additional tray.  
- ML-S3710A  
• SCX-4835FD/FR/5639FR/5739FW  
- ML-S3712A  
       
3. Maintenance  
93  
Available accessories  
Accessory  
Function  
Part name  
IEEE 1284 Parallel Connector Allows you to use various interface.  
ML-PAR100  
• When installing the printer driver  
with an IEEE1284 parallel  
connector, the machine might not  
be found and after installing the  
printer driver, only basic printing  
features are available.  
• If you want to check the machine's  
status or set the settings, connect  
the machine to a computer with a  
USB cable or a network.  
• If you use the IEEE 1284 parallel  
connector, you can not use the  
USB cable.  
 
3. Maintenance  
94  
Available maintenance parts  
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by  
an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any  
maintenance parts once it has reached its “Average yield”.  
Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below.  
The purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life  
span of each item has been met.  
a
parts  
Average yield  
Document feeder rubber pad Approx. 20,000 pages  
Transfer roller  
Fuser unit  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
Approx. 90,000 pages  
Approx. 90,000 pages  
Approx. 60,000 pages  
Pickup roller  
Retard roller  
a. It will be affected by the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media ,  
media size and job complexity.  
   
3. Maintenance  
95  
Redistributing toner  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:  
Thoroughly shake side to side the cartridge five or six times to  
distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
2
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation  
side to side.  
The Status LED blinks red.  
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by  
redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases,  
white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have  
redistributed the toner.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water: hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out.  
1
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use  
the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
3
   
3. Maintenance  
96  
Redistributing toner  
Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the  
cartridge into the opening in the machine.  
3
Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.  
4
3. Maintenance  
97  
Replacing the toner cartridge  
Remove the label from the toner cartridge as shown below.  
3
4
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of life, the machine will  
stop printing.  
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out.  
1
Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the  
toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
3
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water; hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use  
the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.  
2
   
3. Maintenance  
98  
Replacing the toner cartridge  
Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the  
cartridge into the opening in the machine.  
5
Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely  
closed.  
6
3. Maintenance  
99  
Upgrading a memory module  
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this  
memory module slot to install additional memory.  
Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory  
module on the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that  
the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each  
other.  
4
5
Order information is provided for additional memory module. (See  
1
Installing a memory module  
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
1
2
Grasp the control board cover and remove it.  
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match  
those on an actual memory module and its slot.  
Press the memory module into the slot with care until you  
hear a ‘click’.  
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module  
may be damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the  
slot properly, carefully try the previous procedure again.  
Remove the new memory module from its bag.  
3
     
3. Maintenance  
100  
Upgrading a memory module  
Replace the control board cover.  
6
7
Reconnect the power cord and machine cable and turn the  
machine on.  
3. Maintenance  
101  
Monitoring the supplies life  
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the  
corresponding parts, if necessary.  
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 32).  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.  
1
2
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.  
Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.  
ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages printed by using the document feeder.  
Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned by using scanner glass.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
   
3. Maintenance  
102  
Setting the toner low alert  
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the  
option for whether or not this message or LED appears.  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Toner Low Alert on the control panel.  
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup > Toner Status Alert on the LCD display.  
Select the option you want.  
2
3
Press OK to save the selection.  
   
3. Maintenance  
103  
Cleaning the machine  
3
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a  
dusty enviroment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep  
it in the best printing condition and use your machine longer.  
Cleaning the inside  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can  
accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality  
problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of  
the machine clears and reduces these problems.  
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning  
materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or  
other strong substances can discolor or distort the  
cabinet.  
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the  
machine to cool down.  
• If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated  
with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue  
dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum  
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to  
you.  
1
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on  
a clean flat surface.  
2
2
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the  
cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto  
or into the machine.  
3
       
3. Maintenance  
104  
Cleaning the machine  
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose  
it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece  
of paper, if necessary.  
While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to  
damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not  
use solvents such as benzene or thinner. Printing quality  
problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.  
• Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner  
cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid  
touching this area.  
Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover.  
4
With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled  
toner from the toner cartridge area.  
3
3. Maintenance  
105  
Cleaning the machine  
4
Clean the pickup roller with a soft, lint-free cloth.  
3
4
Cleaning the pickup roller  
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the  
machine to cool down.  
1
Pull out tray 1.  
2
Insert the tray back into the machine.  
 
3. Maintenance  
106  
Cleaning the machine  
5
Cleaning the scan unit  
3
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies.  
We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and  
during the day as needed.  
1
2
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with  
1
water.  
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
2
3
1 Scanner lid  
2 Scanner glass  
3 White sheet  
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.  
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it  
is clean and dry.  
4
5
Close the scanner lid.  
 
4. Troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an  
error.  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you  
encounter an error. If your machine has a display screen, check the  
message on the display screen first to solve the error.  
If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer  
to the Troubleshooting chapter in the Advanced User's Guide.  
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem  
persists, call for service.  
 
4. Troubleshooting  
108  
Tips for avoiding paper jams  
By selecting the correct media s, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 49).  
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper s in a tray.  
   
4. Troubleshooting  
109  
Clearing original document jams  
1
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning  
message appears on the display.  
Original paper jam in front of scanner  
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.  
Open the document feeder cover.  
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed  
document slowly and carefully.  
1
2
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick,  
thin or mixed paper- originals.  
   
4. Troubleshooting  
110  
Clearing original document jams  
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.  
Close the document feeder cover.  
3
4
4. Troubleshooting  
111  
Clearing original document jams  
2
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.  
3
Original paper jam inside of scanner  
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.  
Open the document feeder cover.  
1
2
If you see no paper in this area, go to next step.  
4. Troubleshooting  
112  
Clearing original document jams  
Open the document feeder.  
Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed  
area by carefully pulling it.  
4
5
Close the document feeder.  
6
4. Troubleshooting  
113  
Clearing original document jams  
3
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.  
Open the document feeder cover.  
1
2
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner  
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.  
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.  
1
2
4
Original paper jam in scanner duplex path  
For SCX-4833FR, SCX-4835FR, SCX-563x Series and SCX-573x  
Series.  
 
4. Troubleshooting  
114  
Clearing original document jams  
Open the duplex jam cover.  
Pull the jammed paper gently out of the document feeder.  
3
4
Close the duplex jam cover and the document feeder cover. If  
you do not see paper in this area, go to the next step.  
4. Troubleshooting  
115  
Clearing original document jams  
Open the document feeder.  
Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed  
area by carefully pulling it.  
5
6
Close the document feeder.  
7
4. Troubleshooting  
116  
Clearing paper jams  
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is  
automatically ejected from the machine.  
1
2
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly  
and gently.  
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.  
Pull out tray 1 .  
5
In tray 1  
     
4. Troubleshooting  
117  
Clearing paper jams  
6
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
3
In optional tray2  
Pull out optional tray 2.  
1
2
Remove the jammed paper from the machine.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see  
the paper in this area, check the fuser area around the toner  
Insert tray 1 back into the machine until it snaps into place.  
Printing automatically resumes.  
4
 
4. Troubleshooting  
118  
Clearing paper jams  
7
If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see  
the paper in this area, stop and go to the next step.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
Pull tray 1 half-way out.  
3
4
Pull the paper straight up and out.  
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the  
machine.  
1
2
Insert the trays back into the machine. Printing automatically  
resumes.  
5
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
 
4. Troubleshooting  
119  
Clearing paper jams  
8
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
2
Inside the machine  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from  
the machine.  
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out.  
1
Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover. Printing  
automatically resumes.  
3
3
 
4. Troubleshooting  
120  
Clearing paper jams  
9
If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance  
when you pull, stop and go to the next step.  
In the exit area  
Open the rear cover.  
3
4
Remove the jammed paper as shown in the following figure.  
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is  
automatically ejected from the machine.  
1
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to the next step.  
Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.  
2
3
1 fuser door  
Close the rear cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
In the duplex unit area  
5
10  
   
4. Troubleshooting  
121  
Clearing paper jams  
Pull the duplex unit out of the machine.  
If the paper does not come out with the duplex unit, remove  
the paper from the bottom of the machine.  
1
Remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit.  
If you still do not see the paper, go to the next step.  
2
4. Troubleshooting  
122  
Clearing paper jams  
Insert the duplex unit into the machine.  
3
3
1 fuser door  
Close the rear cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
6
Open the rear cover.  
4
5
Remove the jammed paper as shown in the following figure.  
4. Troubleshooting  
123  
Understanding the status LED  
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.  
• Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country.  
• To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part.  
• You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’s Printing Status or Smart Panel program window.  
• If the problem persists, call a service representative.  
Status  
Green  
Red  
Description  
Status LED  
Off  
The machine is off-line.  
Blinking When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.  
On • The machine is on-line and can be used.  
Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display  
message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. For some models that does not  
support the display screen on the control panel, this feature is not applicable.  
• Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Prepare a  
new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing  
a
On  
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life . It is recommended to replace the  
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.  
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.  
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding  
   
4. Troubleshooting  
124  
Understanding the status LED  
Status  
Description  
When the machine is connected to a wireless network, Wireless LED lights on blue.  
Wireless  
LED  
Blue  
On  
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/  
IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain  
in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing.  
4. Troubleshooting  
125  
Understanding display messages  
11  
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the  
machine’s status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand  
the messages’ and their meaning, and correct the problem, if  
necessary.  
Paper Jam-related messages  
Suggested  
solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
• If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try  
the printing job again. If the problem persists, call a service  
representative.  
Document jam  
The loaded original Clear the jam (see  
document has  
jammed in the  
"Clearing original  
document jams" on  
Remove jam  
• When you call for service, provide the service  
Original paper jam  
Original paper jam  
inside of scanner.  
representative with the contents of display message.  
document feeder. page 109).  
• Some messages may not appear on the display depending  
on the options or models.  
Remove jam.  
• [error number] indicates the error number.  
DADF Exit Jam  
The loaded original Clear the jam (see  
document has  
jammed in the  
"Original paper jam  
in scanner duplex  
DADF Duplex Jam  
duplex document path" on page 113).  
feeder.  
Paper Jam  
Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see "In  
in the paper feed  
area.  
in Tray 1  
Paper Jam 0 in tray1  
Paper Jam  
Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see "In  
in the optional tray. optional tray2" on  
in Tray 2  
Paper Jam 0 in tray2  
   
4. Troubleshooting  
126  
Understanding display messages  
Suggested  
solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Paper Jam  
Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see "In  
in the multi-  
purpose tray.  
in MP Tray  
Paper Jam 0 in MP  
tray  
Paper Jam  
Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see  
in the inside  
machine.  
inside machine  
Jam inside machine  
Paper Jam  
Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see "In  
in the paper exit  
area.  
in exit area  
Jam in exit area  
Paper Jam  
Paper has jammed Clear the jam (see "In  
in the duplex area. the duplex unit area"  
bottom of duplex  
Jam bottom of  
duplex  
Duplex Jam  
4. Troubleshooting  
127  
Understanding display messages  
12  
Toner-related messages  
ꢀ  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Install a toner cartridge.  
Install Toner  
A toner cartridge is not installed.  
Toner not installed  
Toner cartridge is not  
installed. Install it.  
Not Compatible  
The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your Install a Samsung-genuine toner cartridge, designed for  
machine. your machine.  
Toner cartridge  
Toner Not Compatible  
Toner cartridge is not  
compatible. Check  
guide  
Prepare new cartridge Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge. Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement. You may  
The estimated cartridge life of toner is close.  
temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing  
Prepare new toner  
Prepare new toner  
cartridge  
4. Troubleshooting  
128  
Understanding display messages  
Message  
Replace  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge • You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the  
life. The machine stops printing.  
control panel. If you select Stop, the printer stops  
printing and you cannot print any more without  
changing the cartridge. If you select Continue, the  
printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be  
guaranteed.  
new cartridge  
Replace new toner  
End of life, Replace  
with new toner  
cartridge  
Estimated cartridge life means the expected  
or estimated toner cartridge life, which  
indicates the average capacity of print-outs  
and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752  
number of pages may be affected by  
operating environment, printing interval,  
media , percentage of image area, and  
media size. Some amount of toner may  
remain in the cartridge even when replace  
new cartridge appears and the machine  
stops printing.  
• Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality  
when this message appears. Using a cartridge beyond  
this stage can result in printing quality issues (see  
Toner Exhausted  
Samsung does not recommend using a non-  
genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as  
refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot  
guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner  
cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a  
result of using non-genuine Samsung toner  
cartridges will not be covered under the  
machine warranty.  
• If the machine stops printing, replace the toner cartridge  
4. Troubleshooting  
129  
Understanding display messages  
13  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Tray-related messages  
Paper Empty  
There is no paper in Load paper in the  
the multi-purpose  
tray.  
multi-purpose tray  
in MP tray  
Paper Empty in  
MP  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Output bin full  
The output tray is  
full.  
Remove papers from  
the output tray, the  
printer resumes  
printing.  
Paper is empty  
in MP tray.  
Load paper  
Remove paper  
Output bin full  
Output bin full.  
Remove printed  
paper  
Pulled Out  
The tray is not  
securely latched.  
Close the tray until it  
locks into place.  
Tray 1 Cassette  
Pulled Out  
The tray is not  
securely latched.  
Close the tray until it  
locks into place.  
Paper Empty  
There is no paper in Load paper in tray 1  
Tray 2 Cassette  
tray 1.  
in Tray 1  
Paper Empty in  
tray 1  
Paper mismatch  
Load the required size  
paper.  
The paper size  
specified in the  
printer properties  
does not match the  
paper you are  
loading.  
Paper is empty  
in tray 1.  
Load paper  
Paper Empty  
There is no paper in Load paper in tray 2  
tray 2.  
in Tray 2  
Paper Empty in  
tray 2  
Paper is empty  
in tray 2.  
Load paper  
4. Troubleshooting  
130  
Understanding display messages  
14  
15  
Network-related messages  
Misc. messages  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Network  
Problem  
The network IP  
address you have  
set is being used by necessary (see  
someone else. Advanced Guide).  
Check the IP address  
and reset it if  
Door Open  
The front cover or  
rear cover is not  
securely latched.  
Close the cover until it  
locks into place.  
Close it  
IP Conflict  
Door is open  
IP Conflict  
Close it  
This IP address  
conflicts with  
that of other  
system  
Door of scanner Thedocumentfeeder Close the cover until it  
is open  
cover is not securely locks into place.  
latched.  
Scanner door  
open  
802.1x  
Fail to authenticate. Check the network  
authentication  
Door of scanner  
is open.  
Close the door  
Network Error  
protocol. If the  
problem persists,  
contact your network  
administrator.  
802.1x Network  
Error  
Error [error  
number]  
The machine unit  
Reboot the power and  
Contact the  
Admin.  
cannot be controlled. try the printing job  
again. If the problem  
persists, please call for  
service.  
Turn off then on  
Memory Full  
The fax memory is  
almost full.  
Print or remove the  
received fax job in  
Secure Receive (see  
Advanced Guide).  
Fax memory is  
almost full.  
Print or remove  
received fax job  
4. Troubleshooting  
131  
Understanding display messages  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Memory Full  
The memory is full.  
Print or remove the  
received fax job in  
Secure Receive (see  
Advanced Guide).  
Remove Job  
Memory Full  
Fax memory is  
full.  
Print or remove  
received fax job  
Scanner Locked The scanner is locked. Reboot the power. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
5. Appendix  
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning  
applicable regulations.  
 
5. Appendix  
133  
Specifications  
1
General specifications  
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com/printer for possible changes in  
information.  
Items  
Description  
Dimension  
Weight  
Width x Length x Height • SCX-4833FD, SCX-4833HD and SCX-4835FD: 424 x 382 x 407 mm (16.69 x 15.04 x 16.02  
inches)  
• SCX-4833FR, SCX-4835FR, SCX-5637FR, SCX-5637HR, SCX-5639FR, SCX-5737FW and  
SCX-5739FW: 469 x 438 x 447 mm (18.46 x 17.24 x 17.60 inches)  
Machine with  
consumables  
• SCX-4833FD, SCX-4833HD and SCX-4835FD: 14 kg (30.86 lbs)  
• SCX-4833FR, SCX-4835FR, SCX-5637FR, SCX-5637HR, SCX-5639FR, SCX-5737FW and  
SCX-5739FW: 16 kg (35.27 lbs)  
a
Ready mode  
Print mode  
30 dB (A)  
Noise Level  
• SCX-4833FD, SCX-4833HD, SCX-4835FD, SCX-4833FR and SCX-4835FR: 52dB (A)  
• SCX-5637FR, SCX-5637HR, SCX-5639FR, SCX-5737FW and SCX-5739FW: 53 dB (A)  
Copy mode  
54 dB (A)  
Scan mode (scanner glass) 50 dB (A)  
Scan mode (document  
feeder)  
51 dB (A)  
   
5. Appendix  
134  
Specifications  
Items  
Description  
Temperature  
Operation  
10 to 32°C (50 to 89.6°F)  
-20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)  
20 to 80% RH  
Storage (packed)  
Operation  
Humidity  
Storage (packed)  
110 volt models  
220 volt models  
10 to 90% RH  
b
AC 110 - 127 V  
Power rating  
AC 220 - 240 V  
Power consumption Average operating mode • SCX-4833FD, SCX-4833HD, SCX-4835FD, SCX-4833FR and SCX-4835FR: Less than 600 W  
• SCX-5637FR, SCX-5637HR, SCX-5639FR, SCX-5737FW and SCX-5739FW: Less than 650  
W
Ready mode  
• SCX-4833FD, SCX-4833HD and SCX-4835FD, SCX-4833FR, SCX-4835FR, SCX-5637FR,  
SCX-5637HR and SCX-5639FR: Less than 50 W  
• SCX-5737FW and SCX-5739FW: Less than 65 W  
Power save mode  
• SCX-4833FD, SCX-4833HD and SCX-4835FD, SCX-4833FR, SCX-4835FR, SCX-5637FR,  
SCX-5637HR and SCX-5639FR: Less than 8 W  
• SCX-5737FW and SCX-5739FW: Less than 10 W  
Power off mode  
Module  
0 W  
c
U98Z058  
Wireless  
a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.  
b. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.  
c. SCX-5737FW and SCX-5739FW only.  
5. Appendix  
135  
Specifications  
2
Print media specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray1 / Optional tray  
Multi-purpose tray  
2
2
Plain paper  
Letter  
Legal  
US Folio  
A4  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)  
70 to 90 g/m (19 to 24 lbs bond) 70 to 90 g/m (19 to 24 lbs  
bond)  
2
• 250 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lbs  
2
bond)  
• 50 sheets of 80 g/m (20  
lbs bond)  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Executive  
A5  
2
A6  
• 150 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lbs  
bond)  
   
5. Appendix  
136  
Specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray1 / Optional tray  
Multi-purpose tray  
2
Envelope  
Envelope  
Monarch  
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)  
Not available in tray1/optional  
tray.  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lbs  
bond)  
Envelope No. 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
10  
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)  
Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)  
2
2
Thick paper  
Thicker paper  
Thin paper  
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section  
Plain paper  
section  
91 to 105 g/m (24 to 28 lbs  
bond)  
91 to 105 g/m (24 to 28 lbs  
bond)  
2
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section  
Plain paper  
section  
Not available in tray1/optional  
tray.  
164 to 220 g/m (44 to 58 lbs  
bond)  
2
2
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section  
Plain paper  
section  
60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs bond) 60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs  
bond)  
2
Transparency  
Letter, A4  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Not available in tray1/optional  
tray.  
138 to 146 g/m (36.81 to  
38.91 lbs bond)  
5. Appendix  
137  
Specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray1 / Optional tray  
Multi-purpose tray  
b
2
Letter, Legal, Refer to the Plain paper section  
US Folio, A4,  
JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Not available in tray1/optional  
tray.  
Labels  
120 to 150 g/m (32 to 40 lbs  
bond)  
Executive, A5  
2
2
Card stock  
Letter, Legal, Refer to the Plain paper section  
US Folio, A4,  
JIS B5, ISO B5,  
121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 lbs  
bond)  
121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 lbs  
bond)  
Executive, A5  
2
2
Bond paper  
Refer to the Refer to the Plain paper section  
Plain paper  
section  
106 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 lbs  
bond)  
106 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 lbs  
bond)  
2
c d  
Minimum size (custom)  
Multi-purpose tray: 76 x 127 mm  
60 to 163 g/m (16 to 43 lbs bond) ,  
Not available in optional tray.  
(2.99 x 5 inches)  
Tray 1: 105 x 148.5 mm (4.13 x 5.85  
inches)  
Maximum size (custom)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
b. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.  
c. The paper s available in multi-purpose tray: Plan, Thick, Thicker, Thin, Cotton, Colored, Pre-printed, Recycled, Envelope, Transparency, Labels, Cardstock, Bond,  
Archive  
d. The paper s available in tray 1: Plan, Thick, Thin, Recycled, Cardstock, Bond, Archive  
5. Appendix  
138  
Specifications  
3
System requirements  
Microsoft® Windows®  
Requirement (recommended)  
Operating system  
CPU  
RAM  
free HDD space  
600 MB  
Windows® 2000  
Windows® XP  
Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz)  
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
64 MB (128 MB)  
128 MB (256 MB)  
128 MB (512 MB)  
512 MB (2 GB)  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB (2 GB)  
1.5 GB  
Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
1.25 GB to 2 GB  
10 GB  
Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)  
Windows Vista®  
Windows® 7  
Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz  
15 GB  
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher  
16 GB  
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).  
• DVD-R/W Drive  
Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2 GB)  
10 GB  
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.  
• Users who have administrator rights can install the software.  
   
5. Appendix  
139  
Specifications  
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.  
• For Windows 2000, Services Pack 4 or higher is required.  
Macintosh  
Requirements (Recommended)  
Operating system  
CPU  
RAM  
Free HDD space  
1 GB  
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.4  
• Intel® processors  
• PowerPC G4/G5  
• 128 MB for a powerPC based  
Mac (512 MB)  
• 512 MB for an Intel-based Mac  
(1 GB)  
Mac OS X 10.5  
Mac OS X 10.6  
• Intel® processors  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB  
1 GB  
• 867 MHz or faster Power  
PC G4/G5  
• Intel® processors  
1 GB (2 GB)  
 
5. Appendix  
140  
Specifications  
Linux  
Items  
Requirements  
Operating system Redhat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)  
Fedora 5 ~ 13 (32/64 bit)  
SuSE Linux 10.1 (32 bit)  
OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)  
Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)  
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64 bit)  
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)  
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)  
CPU  
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)  
512 MB (1 GB)  
RAM  
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)  
Unix  
Items  
Operating system Sun Solaris 9, 10 (x86, SPARC)  
HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)  
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4  
Requirements  
   
5. Appendix  
141  
Specifications  
Items  
Requirements  
Free HDD space  
Up to 100 MB  
4
Network environment  
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 7)  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network  
environments supported by the machine.  
Items  
Specifications  
Network interface  
• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX  
• 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN  
Network operating system • Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2  
• Various Linux OS  
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6  
• Unix  
 
5. Appendix  
142  
Specifications  
Items  
Specifications  
Network protocols  
• TCP/IPv4  
• DHCP, BOOTP  
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP  
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD  
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP (S), IPSec, 802.1x  
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP (S), IPSec)  
Wireless security  
• Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK), WPA Enterprise, WPA2  
Enterprise  
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES  
5. Appendix  
143  
Regulatory information  
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and  
certified with several regulatory statements.  
Warning  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover  
removed from laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam,  
although invisible, can damage your eyes.  
5
Laser safety statement  
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should  
always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to  
persons:  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of  
DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products,  
and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the  
requirements of IEC 60825-1 : 2007.  
E n g lis h  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser  
system and printer are designed so there is never any human access  
to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user  
maintenance or prescribed service condition.  
G e rm a n  
F re n c h  
Ita lia n  
Wavelength: 800 nm  
S p a n is h  
Beam divergence  
P o rtu g u e s  
-
-
Paraller: 12 degrees  
D u tc h  
Perpendicular: 35 degrees  
D a n is h  
Maximum power or energy output: 15 mW  
N o rw e g ia n  
S w e d is h  
F in n is h  
   
5. Appendix  
144  
Regulatory information  
6
8
Ozone safety  
Power saver  
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm.  
Because ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in  
a place with good ventilation.  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation  
technology that reduces power consumption when it is  
not in active use.  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended  
period of time, power consumption is automatically  
lowered.  
7
Mercury Safety  
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are  
registered U.S. marks.  
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or  
Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)  
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program  
see http://www.energystar.gov  
9
Recycling  
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this  
product in an environmentally responsible manner.  
5. Appendix  
145  
Regulatory information  
10  
11  
Correct disposal of this product (Waste  
electrical & electronic equipment)  
China only  
(Applicable in the european union and other  
european countries with separate collection  
systems)  
This marking on the product, accessories or literature  
indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g.  
charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with  
other household waste at the end of their working life. To  
prevent possible harm to the environment or human health  
from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these  
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to  
promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they  
purchased this product, or their local government office, for  
details of where and how they can take these items for  
environmentally safe recycling.  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the  
terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product  
and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other  
commercial wastes for disposal.  
5. Appendix  
146  
Regulatory information  
13  
(The United States of America only)  
Taiwan only  
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find  
the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799  
12  
14  
Correct disposal of batteries in this product  
Radio frequency emissions  
(Applicable in the European Union and other  
European countries with separate battery return  
systems.)  
FCC information to the user  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions:  
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging  
indicates that the batteries in this product should not be  
disposed with other household waste at the end of their  
working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd  
or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium  
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66.  
If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances  
can cause harm to human health or the environment. To  
protect natural resources and to promote material reuse,  
please separate batteries from other s of waste and recycle  
them through your local, free battery return system.  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
This device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
5. Appendix  
147  
Regulatory information  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Canadian radio interference regulations  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio  
noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-  
causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003  
of the Industry and Science Canada.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits  
radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B  
prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils  
Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.  
15  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
United States of America  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15  
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless  
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may  
be present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only  
applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to  
verify the presence of wireless devices.  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the  
manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the  
user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use  
in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system  
label.  
5. Appendix  
148  
Regulatory information  
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation  
between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near  
the body (this does not include extremities). This device should be  
used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless  
devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices),  
which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF  
exposure limits as set by the FCC.  
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:  
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna  
combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/  
cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna  
installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum  
distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device  
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and  
transmitting antenna.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction  
with any other antenna or transmitter.  
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
16  
Russia only  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify  
them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void  
the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service.  
5. Appendix  
149  
Regulatory information  
17  
20  
Israel only  
Canada only  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical  
specifications. / Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications  
techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the  
maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a  
telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of  
any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the  
sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice  
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal  
de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface  
telephonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une  
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la  
somme d’indices d’equivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs  
n’excede pas cinq.  
18  
Germany only  
19  
Turkey only  
5. Appendix  
150  
Regulatory information  
21  
22  
Fax Branding  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful  
for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send  
any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message  
clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted  
page or on the first page of the transmission the following  
information:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for  
this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or  
rear of the machine. In some instances you may need to provide  
these numbers to the telephone company.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical  
load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining  
whether you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several s of  
equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems  
making and receiving telephone calls, especially ringing when your  
line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the  
equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order  
to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases,  
a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone  
equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately  
remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the  
telephone network.  
1 the date and time of transmission  
2 identification of either business, business entity or individual  
sending the message; and  
3 telephone number of either the sending machine, business,  
business entity or individual.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications  
facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is  
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not  
inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such  
changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer  
terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company  
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of  
such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or  
performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in  
writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain  
uninterrupted service  
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the  
requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is  
a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier  
in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be  
provided to the telephone company.  
5. Appendix  
151  
Regulatory information  
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power  
surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both  
the power and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be  
purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic  
specialty stores.  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this  
equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer  
could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. In  
the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the  
telephone network, the telephone company should notify  
the customer that service may be stopped. However, where  
prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily  
cease service, providing that they:  
a promptly notify the customer.  
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the  
equipment problem.  
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to  
the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to  
procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E  
of Part 68.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test  
calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to  
advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The  
dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually  
test the emergency number.  
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by  
means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
23  
You should also know that:  
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX  
system.  
Important  
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the  
same phone line as your machine, you may experience  
transmission and reception problems with all the equipment. It is  
recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular  
telephone, share the line with your machine.  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13  
amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the  
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to  
replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the  
plug until you have another fuse cover.  
5. Appendix  
152  
Regulatory information  
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the  
letter “N” or colored black.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be  
suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have  
normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug  
adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with  
the letter “L” or colored red.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the  
distribution board.  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
24  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric  
shock if you plug it into a socket.  
Declaration of conformity (European  
countries)  
Approvals and Certifications  
Important warning:  
You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
Green and Yellow: Earth  
Blue: Neutral  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes  
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity  
with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the  
European Union as of the dates indicated:  
Brown: Live  
Hereby, Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in  
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant  
provisions of:  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your  
plug, do the following:  
SCX-483x Series, SCX-563x Series: Low Voltage Directive  
(2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by  
the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and  
yellow or green.  
SCX-573x Series: R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC)  
5. Appendix  
153  
Regulatory information  
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at  
www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and  
enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use  
in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark  
with  
a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol  
is on the system label.  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of  
the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be  
embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set  
by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC),  
approximation of the laws of the Member States related to  
electromagnetic compatibility.  
European states qualified under wireless approvals:  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment  
and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual  
recognition of their conformity. A full declaration, defining the  
relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from  
your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.  
EU  
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland,  
France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece, Hungary,  
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands,  
Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K.  
European radio approval information (for products  
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)  
EEA/EFTA countries  
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland  
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless  
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may  
be present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for  
home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are  
present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless  
devices.  
European states with restrictions on use:  
EU  
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for  
devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless  
EEA/EFTA countries  
No limitations at this time  
5. Appendix  
154  
Regulatory information  
25  
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the  
wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the  
body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should  
be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless  
devices are on and transmitting.  
Regulatory compliance statements  
Wireless guidance  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction  
with any other antenna or transmitter.  
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless  
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may  
be present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section  
is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless  
device.  
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices.  
Examples of common restrictions are listed below:  
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with  
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation  
regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while  
traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless  
Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are  
examples of devices that provide wireless communication.  
In environments where the risk of interference to other  
devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the  
option to use a wireless device may be restricted or  
eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas  
laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of  
wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in  
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use  
wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for  
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries  
are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections).  
The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the  
countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system  
rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is  
not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for  
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may  
not be allowed.  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be  
embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as  
known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be  
embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in  
radio frequency safety standards and recommendations,  
manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of  
the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact  
during normal operation.  
authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.  
5. Appendix  
155  
Regulatory information  
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless  
devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device,  
when traveling between countries with your system, check  
with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or  
trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the  
destination country.  
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded  
wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all  
covers and shields are in place and the system is fully  
assembled.  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them  
in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the  
authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service.  
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device  
will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or  
contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional  
information.  
5. Appendix  
156  
Regulatory information  
26  
China only  
5. Appendix  
157  
Copyright  
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.  
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.  
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation.  
True, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.  
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.  
REV. 1.01  
   
158  
Index  
A
D
G
accessories  
darkness button  
default settings  
tray setting  
general icons  
ordering  
H
address book button  
arrow button  
help button  
direct USB button  
display screen  
I
B
E
id copy  
back button  
ID copy button  
eco button  
C
eco printing  
error message  
J
cleaning  
jam  
inside  
F
clearing original document  
clearing paper  
outside  
pickup roller  
scan unit  
favorites settings, for printing  
fax button  
tips for avoiding paper jams  
cleaning a machine  
clear button  
control panel  
convention  
copy button  
copying  
fax sending  
L
multi sending  
Linux  
faxing  
system requirements  
loading  
adjusting darkness  
adjusting resolution  
preparing to fax  
receiving in Fax mode  
features  
paper in multi-purpose tray  
paper in the tray1  
special media  
basic copying  
reducing or enlarging copies  
loading originals  
print media feature  
front view  
159  
Index  
reset button  
resolution  
faxing  
M
P
Macintosh  
Parallel  
system requirements  
maintenance parts  
memory  
installing memory module  
memory upgrading  
menu button  
ordering  
power saver button  
preparing originals type  
print media  
S
safety  
information  
card stock  
symbols  
envelope  
scan button  
scanning  
labels  
menu overview  
multi-purpose tray  
loading  
output support  
preprinted paper  
setting the paper size  
setting the paper type  
special media  
for local connection  
USB flash memory  
secu printing  
specifications  
print media  
tips on using  
using special media  
N
transparency  
start button  
status  
Printing  
network  
installing environment  
numeric keypad  
printing  
stop/clear button  
supplies  
printing a document  
Windows  
O
available supplies  
monitoring the supplies life  
ordering  
USB memory  
OK button  
R
on hook dial button  
optional tray  
loading paper  
ordering  
replacing toner cartridge  
rear view  
redial/pause button  
regulatiory information  
160  
Index  
T
W
toner cartridge  
Windows  
redistributing toner  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
29,  
replacing the cartridge  
tray  
system requirements  
wireless LED  
adjusting the width and length  
changing the tray size  
loading paper in multi-purpose tray  
ordering an optional tray  
ordering an parallel  
setting the paper size and type  
U
understanding the status LED  
Unix  
system requirements  
USB cable  
driver installation  
USB flash memory  
data backup  
managing  
printing  
scanning  
using help  
SCX-483x Series  
SCX-563x Series  
SCX-573x Series  
User’s Guide  
Advanced  
imagine the possibilities  
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and  
troubleshooting on various OS environments.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.  
2
Contents  
81 Custom setup  
1. Software installation  
4. Special features  
Installation for Macintosh  
Reinstallation for Macintosh  
Installation for Linux  
83 Altitude adjustment  
84 Changing the font setting  
85 Storing email address  
87 Entering various characters  
88 Setting up the address book  
91 Registering authorized users  
92 Printing features  
Reinstallation for Linux  
2. Using a network-connected  
machine  
ꢀ  
109 Fax features  
11 Useful network programs  
12 Wired network setup  
118 Scan features  
127 Using shared folder features  
128 Using memory/hard drive features  
16 Installing driver over the network  
28 IPv6 configuration  
31 Wireless network setup  
5. Maintenance  
3. Useful setting menus  
130 Storing the toner cartridge  
132 Tips for moving & storing your machine  
133 Useful management tools  
56 Print menu  
57 Copy menu  
62 Fax menu  
66 Scan menu  
68 System setup  
3
Contents  
6. Troubleshooting  
146 Paper feeding problems  
147 Power and cable connecting problems  
148 Printing problems  
152 Printing quality problems  
160 Copying problems  
161 Scanning problems  
163 Faxing problems  
165 Operating system problems  
1. Software installation  
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software  
for use in an environment where the machine is connected via a cable. A locally  
connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the  
cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below  
and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see "Installing  
• If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the  
machine’s driver.  
• Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).  
 
1. Software installation  
5
Installation for Macintosh  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
Select Typical installation for a local printer and then click  
1
11 OK.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
The Installation process is being executed.  
2
3
12  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the  
13 installation process.  
If your machine does not support the fax function, click  
Cancel to go to the next step.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
If your machine supports the fax function, select your  
machine name from the Printer Name list and click  
Create. When the confirmation window appears, click OK.  
Enter the password and click OK.  
Click Continue.  
Click Continue on the Read Me window.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
14  
15  
After the installation is finished, click Restart.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is  
recommended for most users. All components necessary for  
machine operations will be installed.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual  
components to install.  
When the message that warns that all applications will close  
10 on your computer appears, click Continue.  
   
1. Software installation  
6
Reinstallation for Macintosh  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and  
reinstall it.  
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print  
Setup Utility or Print & Fax.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Enter the password and click OK.  
Click Continue.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.  
When the message which warns that all applications will close  
10 on your computer appears, click Continue.  
When the uninstall is done, click Quit.  
11  
   
1. Software installation  
7
Installation for Linux  
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung  
printer).  
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
6
7
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator  
1
desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for  
your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on-screen  
help that is available through your system menu or from the driver  
package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver  
Configurator or Image Manager.  
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root”  
in the Login field and enter the system password.  
2
Installing the Smart Panel  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine  
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root  
in the Login field and enter the system password.  
2
From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux  
Driver package to your computer.  
3
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine  
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the  
package.  
4
Double click cdroot > autorun.  
From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel  
package to your computer.  
5
3
     
1. Software installation  
8
Installation for Linux  
Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package.  
4
5
Double click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.  
3
Installing the Printer Settings Utility  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root”  
in the Login field and enter the system password.  
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine  
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings  
Utility package to your computer.  
3
Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract  
the package.  
4
Double click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh.  
5
 
1. Software installation  
9
Reinstallation for Linux  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and  
reinstall it.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root”  
in the Login field and enter the system password.  
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer  
driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the  
Terminal screen appears, type in the following.  
3
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/  
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh  
Click Uninstall.  
4
5
6
Click Next.  
Click Finish.  
   
2. Using a network-connected  
machine  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network  
connected machine and software.  
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your  
model.  
 
2. Using a network-connected machine  
11  
Useful network programs  
2
There are several programs available to setup the network settings  
easily in a network environment. For the network administrator  
especially, managing several machines on the network is possible.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service  
ꢀ  
Web-based machine management solution for network  
administrators. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an  
efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely  
corporate internet access. Download this program from http://  
solution.samsungprinter.com.  
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.  
1
SyncThru™ Web Service  
ꢀ  
3
SetIP Wired network setup  
ꢀ  
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to  
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and  
manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.  
Check the supplies information and status.  
Customize machine settings.  
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the  
machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will  
be sent to a certain person's email automatically.  
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to  
connect to various network environments.  
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.  
   
2. Using a network-connected machine  
12  
Wired network setup  
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on  
your network.  
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your  
machine’s MAC address and IP address.  
You can use network after connecting network cable to a  
corresponding port on your machine.  
For example:  
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78  
IP Address: 192.0.0.192  
For models that do not have the display screen on the control  
panel, use the SyncThru™ Web Service or SetIP program.  
-
-
5
Setting IP address  
ꢀ  
For models that have the display screen on the control panel,  
configure the network setting by pressing (Menu) button >  
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and  
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically  
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server  
located on the network.  
4
Printing a network configuration report  
ꢀ  
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)  
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s  
control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings.  
This will help you to set up a network.  
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from  
Control Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.  
Install this program from the supplied CD-ROM by double-  
click Application > SetIP > Setup.exe.  
The machine has the display screen: Press the  
button on the control panel and select Network > Network  
Conf. (Network Configuration) > Yes.  
(Menu)  
1
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
2
3
The machine does not have the display screen: Press the  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button for more than five seconds on the  
control panel.  
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
           
2. Using a network-connected machine  
13  
Wired network setup  
Turn on the machine.  
4
5
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network  
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network  
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs >  
Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP.  
colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Click the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open  
the TCP/IP configuration window.  
6
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically  
print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the  
settings are correct.  
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration  
window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to  
have this information assigned by a network manager before  
proceeding.  
8
7
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Macintosh)  
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from  
System Preferences > Security > Firewall.  
The following instructions may vary from your model.  
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
1
2
Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window,  
select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP >  
SetIPapplet.html.  
   
2. Using a network-connected machine  
14  
Wired network setup  
Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then  
select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html  
page that shows the printer’s name and IP address  
information.  
IPv4 configuation using SetIP (Linux)  
3
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from  
System Preferences or Administrator.  
Click the  
the TCP/IP configuration window.  
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open  
4
5
The following instructions may vary from your model or  
operating systems.  
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration  
window. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this  
information assigned by a network manager before  
proceeding.  
Open /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.  
1
2
3
4
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.  
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.  
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network  
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network  
colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration  
window. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this  
information assigned by a network manager before  
proceeding.  
Select Apply, then OK, and OK again.  
6
7
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network  
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network  
colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Quit Safari.  
   
2. Using a network-connected machine  
15  
Wired network setup  
The machine will automatically print the Network  
Configuration Report.  
5
2. Using a network-connected machine  
16  
Installing driver over the network  
6
Windows  
When you click the Advanced Installation, you can use the  
Custom Installation option. The Custom Installation  
allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose  
individual components to install. Follow the instructions on  
the window.  
ꢀ  
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and  
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have  
1
Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of  
the License Agreement. Then, click Next.  
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the  
installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window.  
4
The program searches for the machine.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
If your machine is not found on the network or locally, an  
error message appears.  
Click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which  
represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
Check if you want to install the software without  
connection of the printer.  
- Check this option to install this program without a  
machine connected. In this case, the print a test page  
window will be skipped, and completes the installation.  
- In this case, the XPS driver will not installed, and limit  
the XPS-typed document’s direct printing.  
If you are a Windows XP, Vista, or 7 user, open the Windows  
Explore window. Enter \\[ip address] (example:  
\\169.254.133.42)in the address field, and press the Enter  
key or click Go.  
Double-click Drivers > Setup.exe.  
Select Install Now.  
3
     
2. Using a network-connected machine  
17  
Installing driver over the network  
Search again  
Help  
When you press this button, the firewall notice window  
appears.  
- Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows  
operating system, click Start > Control Panel >  
Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option.  
- Turn off the firewall from the third party's program  
beside the operating system. Refer to the manual  
provided by individual programs.  
If your machine is not connected to the computer or  
network, this help button gives detailed information  
about how to connect the machine.  
SNMP Community Name  
If your system administrator set the new SNMP  
Community Name on the machine, you can find the  
machine in the network. Contact your system  
administrator for new SNMP Community Name.  
Direct Input  
The Direct Input allows you to search for a specific  
machine on the network.  
- Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host  
name. Then click Next.  
The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select  
the one you wish to use and click OK.  
5
To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network  
configuration report (see "Printing a network  
If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation  
window appears.  
- Search by network path: To find a shared machine  
(UNC Path), enter the shared name manually or find a  
shared printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click  
Next.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
6
Silent installation Mode  
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not  
require any user intervention. Once you start the installation, the  
machine driver and software are automatically installed on you  
computer. You can start the silent installation by typing /s or /S in the  
command window.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
18  
Installing driver over the network  
Command-line Parameters  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command  
window.  
/p”<port name>” Specifies printer port.  
or  
Printer port name can  
be specified as IP  
address,hostname,USB  
local port name or  
IEEE1284 port name.  
/P”<port name>”  
Network Port  
will be  
created by  
use of  
Following command-line are effective and operated when  
command is used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional  
commands that can be operated solely.  
For example:  
• /p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”  
in where,  
Standard  
TCP/IP Port  
monitor. For  
local port,  
this port  
must exist on  
system  
before being  
specified by  
command.  
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”  
means IP address for  
network printer. /  
p”USB001”, /  
P”LPT1:”, /  
p”hostname”  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
/s or  
/S  
Starts silent installation. Installs machine drivers  
without prompting any  
UIs or user intervention.  
• When installing the  
driver silently in  
Korean, type in-  
Setup.exe /s /  
L"0x0012” or  
Setup.exe /s /L"18” .  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
19  
Installing driver over the network  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
/a”<dest_path>” Specifies destination  
Since machine drivers  
should be installed on  
the OS specific location,  
this command applies  
to only application  
software.  
/i”<script  
filename>” or  
Specifies customized  
install script file for  
custom operation.  
Customized script file  
can be assigned for  
customized silent  
installation. This script  
file can be created or  
modified through  
provided installer  
customizing utility or  
by text editor.  
or  
path for installation.  
/A”<dest_path>”  
/I”<script  
filename>”  
The  
destination  
path should  
be a fully  
qualified  
path.  
The script  
filename  
should be a  
fullyqualified  
filename.  
This  
customized  
script file is  
prior than  
default  
installer  
setting in  
setup  
package but  
not prior  
than  
command-  
line  
parameters.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
20  
Installing driver over the network  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
/n”<Printer  
name>” or  
Specifies printer name. With this parameter,  
Printer instance shall be you can add printer  
/x or  
/X  
Uses existing machine This command  
driver files to create  
printer instance if it is  
already installed.  
provides a way to install  
a printer instance that  
uses installed printer  
driver files without  
installing an additional  
driver.  
created as specified  
printer name.  
instances as your  
wishes.  
/N”<Printer  
name>”  
/nd or  
/ND  
Commands not to set  
It indicates installed  
the installed driver as a machine driver will not  
default machine driver. be the default machine  
driver on your system if  
there are one or more  
printer drivers installed.  
If there is no installed  
/up”<printer  
name>” or  
Removes only specified This command  
printer instance and  
not the driver files.  
provides a way to  
remove only specified  
printer instance from  
your system without  
effecting other printer  
drivers. It will not  
/UP”<printer  
name>”  
machine driver on your  
system, then this  
option won’t be  
applied because  
Windows OS will set  
remove printer driver  
files from your system.  
installed printer driver  
as a default machine  
driver.  
/d or  
/D  
Uninstalls all device  
driversandapplications remove all installed  
from your system.  
This command will  
device drivers and  
application software  
from your system.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
21  
Installing driver over the network  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
It will install all  
Code  
0X0012  
Language  
/v”<share  
name>” or  
Shares installed  
machine and add other supported Windows OS  
available platform platform’s machine  
drivers for Point & Print. drivers to system and  
share it with specified  
Korean  
0X0804  
0X0404  
0x040c  
0X0007  
0X0010  
0X000a  
0X0013  
0X001D  
0X0006  
0X000b  
0X0014  
0X0019  
0X0005  
0X000e  
0X0008  
0X0816  
0X0416  
Simplified Chinese  
Traditional Chinese  
French  
/V”<share  
name>”  
<share name> for point  
and print.  
German  
/o or  
/O  
Opens Printers and  
Faxes folder after  
installation.  
This command will  
open Printers and  
Faxes folder after the  
silent installation.  
Italian  
Spanish  
Dutch  
/f”<log  
filename>” or  
Specifies log filename. It will create a log file to  
Swedish  
a specified folder.  
The default log file is  
Danish  
/F”<log  
filename>”  
created in the system  
temp folder if not  
specified.  
Finnish  
Norwegian  
Russian  
/h, /H or /?  
Shows Command-line  
Usage.  
Czech  
Language code  
Hungarian  
Greek  
Code  
Language  
Standard Portuguese  
Brazilian Portuguese  
0X0009  
English  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
22  
Installing driver over the network  
7
Code  
0X0015  
Language  
Macintosh  
ꢀ  
Polish  
0X001F  
0X0001  
0X000D  
0x0424  
0X0418  
0X0402  
0X041A  
0X081A  
0X0422  
0X041B  
0X0421  
0x041E  
0X0429  
Turkish  
Arabic  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and  
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have  
1
Hebrew  
Slovenian  
Romanian  
Bulgarian  
Croatian  
Serbian  
Ukraine  
Slovakia  
Indonesian  
Thai  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK.  
4
5
6
7
8
Click Continue.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
Farsi  
 
2. Using a network-connected machine  
23  
Installing driver over the network  
Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is  
recommended for most users. All components necessary for  
machine operations will be installed.  
After the installation is finished, click Restart.  
9
16  
Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup  
17 Utility.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual  
components to install.  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.6, open the Applications folder >  
System Preferences and click Print & Fax.  
When the message which warns that all applications will close  
10 on your computer appears, click Continue.  
Click Add on the Printer List.  
18  
19  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.6, click the “+” icon. A display window  
Select Typical installation for a network printer and then  
11 click OK.  
will pop up.  
For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.  
The SetIP program automatically runs.  
12  
13  
For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.  
Click OK to continue the installation.  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.6, click IP.  
The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the  
Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.  
14 installation process.  
20  
21  
If your machine does not support the fax function, click  
When printing a document containing many pages, printing  
performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for  
Printer Type option.  
Cancel to go to the next step.  
If your machine supports the fax function, select your  
machine name from the Printer Name list and click  
Create. When the confirmation window appears, click OK.  
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.  
Click Continue on the Read me window.  
15  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
24  
Installing driver over the network  
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot  
22 determine the queue name for your machine server, try using  
To install other software:  
the default queue first.  
For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
23 Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model  
Name.  
Install the Linux driver and add network printer  
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in  
Model.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and  
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have  
been set.  
1
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.6, if Auto Select does not work  
properly, choose Select Printer Software and your  
machine name in Print Using.  
Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the  
Samsung website.  
2
3
Click Add.  
24  
Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new  
directory.  
Your machine appears in the Printer List, and is set as the  
default machine.  
Double-click the Linux folder > install.sh icon.  
The Samsung installer window opens. Click Continue.  
The add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.  
Select network printer and click Search button.  
8
4
5
6
7
Linux  
ꢀ  
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung  
printer).  
 
2. Using a network-connected machine  
25  
Installing driver over the network  
The machine’s IP address and model name appears on list  
field.  
After the machine is added, click Finish.  
8
8
9
Select your machine and click Next.  
Input the printer description and Next.  
After the machine is added, click Finish.  
When installation is done, click Finish.  
UNIX  
ꢀ  
9
10  
11  
12  
Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating  
system before installing the UNIX printer driver (see Basic  
Guide).  
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer  
driver package first, then setup the printer. You can download the  
UNIX printer driver package from the Samsung website.  
Add a network printer  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Installing the UNIX printer driver package  
Click Add Printer.  
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS  
mentioned.  
The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.  
Select Network printer and click the Search button.  
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX  
Printer Driver package to your computer.  
1
The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.  
Acquire root privileges.  
2
Select your machine and click Next.  
su -  
Enter the printer description and click Next.  
 
2. Using a network-connected machine  
26  
Installing driver over the network  
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX  
computer.  
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation  
results.  
3
7
8
Run ‘installprinter’ from the command line. This will bring up  
the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this  
window referring to the following procedures.  
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.  
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package name.  
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added  
printers may not be enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In  
this case run the following two commands on the root  
terminal:  
4
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following command (without  
“).  
gzip -d < "package archive name" | tar xf -  
accept <printer_name>  
enable <printer_name>  
The “binaries” folder consists of binz, install, share files and  
folders.  
Change to the driver’s “binaries” directory.  
For example, on IBM AIX,  
5
6
Uninstalling the printer driver package  
cd aix_power/binaries  
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in  
the system.  
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.  
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.  
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.  
b Select the printer to be deleted.  
Run the install script.  
./install  
install is the installer script file which is used to install or  
uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package.  
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to  
the installer script.  
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
27  
Installing driver over the network  
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole  
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device  
textbox for network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with  
jetdirect Queue type, only the DNS name is possible-numeric  
IP address is not allowed.  
6
package.  
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c”  
command.  
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the  
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on  
Sun Solaris OS.  
To re-install it, use the command “. /install” to reinstall the binaries.  
7
Setting up the printer  
Select Copies to set the number of copies.  
8
9
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the  
command line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window.  
Setup the printer in this window according to the following steps:  
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.  
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the  
Type the name of the printer.  
10 reverse order.  
1
2
3
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.  
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.  
11  
12  
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer  
in the Type field. This is optional.  
Click OK to add the printer.  
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is  
optional.  
4
5
Specify the printer location in the Location field.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
28  
IPv6 configuration  
The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the  
instructions in the window.  
7
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.  
If the machine does not work in the network environment,  
activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.  
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the  
network setting to the factory defaults and try again using  
10  
Activating IPv6  
ꢀ  
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use  
the IPv6 address.  
Select  
on the control panel.  
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate  
1
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
1
2
3
Select On and press OK.  
2
3
4
Turn on the machine.  
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.  
Reinstall your printer driver.  
Print a Network Configuration Report that will check IPv6  
Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes.  
4
5
Click Add a printer in the left pane of the Printers and Faxes  
windows.  
Click Add a local printer in the Add Printer windows.  
6
   
2. Using a network-connected machine  
29  
IPv6 configuration  
11  
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.  
Setting IPv6 addresses  
ꢀ  
Manual address configuration  
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network  
printing and managements.  
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports  
IPv6 addressing as a URL.  
1
2
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address  
starts with FE80).  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the  
mouse cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then  
click Network Settings.  
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a  
network router.  
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.  
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.  
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.  
3
4
Select the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/  
Prefix text box is activated.  
DHCPv6 address configuration (Stateful)  
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the  
following options for default dynamic host configuration.  
Enter IPv6 address and a prefix length (e.g.,:  
3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA/64).  
5
6
Select  
(Menu) > Network > OK > TCP/IP (IPv6) > OK >  
1
2
Click the Apply button.  
DHCPv6 Config on the control panel.  
Press OK to select the required value you want.  
DHCPv6 Addr.: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router  
request.  
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router  
request.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
30  
IPv6 configuration  
12  
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
ꢀ  
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports  
IPv6 addressing as a URL.  
1
2
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address,  
Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from  
Network Configuration Report (see "Printing a network  
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://  
[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).  
3
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
31  
Wireless network setup  
Wireless network name and network key  
Make sure your machine supports a wireless network.  
Wireless network may not be available depending on the  
model.  
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is  
first set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a  
Network Key are created for the network. Locate this information  
before proceeding with the machine installation.  
13  
14  
Getting started  
ꢀ  
Choosing the installation type  
ꢀ  
Understanding your network type  
You can install a wireless network from the machine’s control panel  
or the computer.  
Typically, you can only have one connection between your  
computer and the machine at a time.  
From the control panel  
Infrastructure mode  
This is an environment generally used for homes and  
SOHOs (Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses  
an access point to communicate with the wireless  
machine.  
You can configure wireless parameters with the control panel (see  
From the computer  
Ad hoc mode  
From the computer, we recommend using a USB cable with the  
program provided in the supplied software CD (see "Setup using  
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless  
computer and wireless machine communicates  
directly.  
               
2. Using a network-connected machine  
32  
Wireless network setup  
After completing the wireless network connection, you need  
to install a machine driver to print from an application (see  
With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network  
using the program on the supplied software CD. Only Windows  
and Macintosh operating systems are supported (see "Setup  
Select  
(Menu) > Network > OK > Wireless > OK > WLAN  
1
2
Settings > OK on the control panel.  
You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings  
Utility with a USB cable after installing the driver (Windows  
and Macintosh operating systems are supported).  
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.  
Wizard: The wireless network interface card in your  
machine searches for wireless networks in the area and  
shows the results.  
With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using  
the SyncThru™ Web Service program (see "Using a network  
Custom: You can configure the wireless settings according  
to your needs.  
15  
Wizard mode  
Using the menu button  
ꢀ  
The wireless network interface card on your machine searches  
for wireless networks in the area and shows the results.  
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of  
your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This  
information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was  
installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment,  
please ask the person who set up your network.  
1
2
Press Search List > OK > select the network > OK.  
You can select a network using SSID.  
 
2. Using a network-connected machine  
33  
Wireless network setup  
Press WLAN Security > OK > None > OK.  
Press OK to select the method of Operation Mode.  
3
3
If you see another message, go to the next step.  
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly  
with each other in a peer-to-peer environment. Go to step  
4.  
According to the network you selected, the WLAN security  
encryption type will be WEP or WPA.  
4
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate  
with each other through an access point. Go to step 5.  
In case of WEP, press the Open System or SharedKey.  
-
Open System: Authentication is not used, and  
Encryption may or may not be used, depending on the  
need for data security. Enter the WEP Key after  
selecting Open System.  
Press OK to select the method of Channel.  
4
5
If you select Auto, the wireless network interface card on your  
machine will automatically adjust the channels.  
-
SharedKey: Authentication is used. A device that has  
a proper WEP Key can access the network. Enter the  
WEP Key after selecting SharedKey.  
Press OK to select the method of WLAN Security.  
None: This is used when the validation of a wireless  
device’s identity and data encryption are not required for  
your network. Open system is used for IEEE 802.11  
authentication.  
In case of WPA, enter the WPA Key. The key length should  
be between 8 and 63 characters long.  
Press OK.  
Static WEP: This uses the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)  
algorithm suggested by IEEE 802.11 standard for security.  
Static WEP security mode requires a proper WEP key for  
data encryption, decryption, and IEEE 802.11  
authentication. Press OK to select the setup method in  
Authentication  
5
Custom mode  
Enter the SSID when Edit SSID appears on the top line of the  
display, the name that identifies a wireless network. SSID is  
case-sensitive so you need to enter it carefully. Press OK.  
1
2
-
Open System: Authentication is not used, and  
encryption may or may not be used, depending on the  
need for data security. Enter the WEP Key.  
Select the type of wireless connections.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
34  
Wireless network setup  
16  
-
SharedKey: Authentication is used. Enter the WEP  
Key after selecting SharedKey.  
Setup using Windows  
ꢀ  
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK: You can select WPA-PSK or  
WPA2-PSK to authenticate the print server based on WPA  
Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally  
called Pre-Shared Key passphrase), which is manually  
configured on the access point and each of its clients.  
Shortcut to Wireless Setting program without CD: If you  
have installed the printer driver once, you can access the  
Wireless Setting program without CD. From the Start menu,  
select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers >  
your printer driver name > Wireless Setting Program.  
a Press OK when WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK appears of on  
the display.  
b Press OK to select TKIP or AES in Encryption. If you  
select WPA2-PSK, press OK to select AES or TKIP +  
AES in Encryption.  
Access point via USB cable  
c Enter the WPA Key.  
Items to prepare  
Press OK.  
Access point  
6
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
Disconnect the network cable (standard or crossover). Your  
machine should then start communicating wirelessly with  
the network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless  
LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.  
Creating the infrastructure network  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
1
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.  
   
2. Using a network-connected machine  
35  
Wireless network setup  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms  
of the License Agreement. Then, click Next.  
3
5
6
Click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which  
represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
The software searches the wireless network.  
If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is  
properly connected between the computer and machine,  
and follow the instructions on the window.  
Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.  
4
After searching, the window shows the wireless network  
devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are  
using and click Next.  
7
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or  
if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click  
Advanced Setting.  
Install Now: If you have already set up the wireless  
network, click this button to install the machine’s driver to  
use the wireless network machine. If you have not set up  
the wireless network, click the Wireless Setting and  
Installation button to set up the wireless network before  
you click this button.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of  
access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.  
Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless  
network settings of your machine with a USB cable then  
install the machine driver. This is only for users who have  
not set up the wireless connection before.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
36  
Wireless network setup  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption  
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data  
security.  
The wireless network security window appears when the  
access point has security settings.  
The wireless network security window appears. The window  
may differ according to its security mode: WEP, or WPA.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a  
proper WEP key can access the network.  
WEP  
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to  
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared  
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre-  
Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on  
the access point and each of its clients.  
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication  
and enter the WEP security key. Click Next.  
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol  
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.  
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged  
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP  
encryption key.  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64,  
WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES).  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
WPA  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network  
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.  
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key  
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also  
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES  
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.  
key value.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select  
the appropriate WEP Key Index.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
37  
Wireless network setup  
The window shows the wireless network settings and checks  
if the settings are correct. Click Next.  
-
-
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet  
mask.)  
8
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if  
DHCP is shown in the window. If it shows Static, click  
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to  
DHCP.  
When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect  
the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click  
Next.  
9
For the Static method  
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.  
10  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if  
Static is shown in the window. If it shows DHCP, click  
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network  
configuration values for the machine. Before entering the  
IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s  
network configuration information. If the computer is set  
to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to  
get the static IP address.  
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the  
setup procedure.  
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.  
Then, click Next.  
Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window  
11 appears.  
For example:  
Select the components to be installed. Click Next.  
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:  
12  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
After selecting the components, you can also change the  
13 machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network,  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as  
follows:  
set the machine as the default machine, and change the port  
name of each machine. Click Next.  
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
38  
Wireless network setup  
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print  
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows  
14 a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.  
a test page.  
1
2
3
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 16.  
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
15  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
Click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which  
represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
To register as a user of the machine in order to receive  
16 information from Samsung, click On-line Registration.  
Click Finish.  
17  
Ad hoc via USB cable  
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the  
machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc  
wireless network by following the simple steps below.  
Items to prepare  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
39  
Wireless network setup  
Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.  
4
If the software has failed to search the network, check if the  
USB cable is connected properly between the computer and  
machine, and follow the instruction in the window.  
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless  
networks your machine has searched appears.  
7
If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting, select  
the last wireless network on the list, Network Name(SSID) is  
portthru and Signal is Printer Self Network.  
Install Now: If you have set the wireless network, click this  
button to install the machine’s driver to use the wireless  
network machine. If you have not set the wireless network,  
click Wireless Setting and Installation button to set the  
wireless network before you click this button.  
Then, click Next.  
If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another  
wireless network from the list.  
Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless  
network settings of your machine’s with a USB cable then  
install the machine driver. This only for users who have not  
set up the wireless connection before.  
If you want to change ad hoc settings click the Advanced  
Setting button.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name  
you want (SSID is case-sensitive).  
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms  
of the License Agreement. Then, click Next.  
5
6
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.  
Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz  
to 2467 MHz).  
The software searches the wireless network.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
40  
Wireless network setup  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption  
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data  
security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a  
proper WEP key can access the network.  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64,  
WEP128).  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network  
key value.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select  
the appropriate WEP Key Index.  
The wireless network security window appears when the ad  
hoc network has security setting.  
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open  
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.  
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol  
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.  
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged  
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP  
encryption key.  
The window showing the wireless network setting appears.  
Check the settings and click Next.  
8
2. Using a network-connected machine  
41  
Wireless network setup  
- IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must  
know the computer’s network configuration information. If  
the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the  
wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if  
the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the  
wireless network setting should also be Static.  
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet  
mask.)  
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
When the wireless network settings are completed,  
disconnect the USB cable between the computer and  
machine. Click Next.  
9
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the  
Static wireless network setting, you must contact the  
network administrator to get the static IP address.  
For the DHCP method  
If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if  
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm  
window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change  
the assignment method to Receive IP address  
automatically (DHCP).  
the steps in the window.  
Click Next if you are finished with the computer’s wireless  
network settings.  
If you set the computer’s wireless network on DHCP, it will  
take several minutes to receive the IP address.  
For the Static method  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if  
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm  
window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter  
the IP address and other network configuration values for  
the machine.  
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.  
10  
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the  
setup procedure.  
For example:  
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.  
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:  
- IP address: 169.254.133.42  
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Then, click Next.  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as  
below:  
Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window  
11 appears.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
42  
Wireless network setup  
17  
Select the components to be installed. Click Next.  
12  
Setup using Macintosh  
ꢀ  
After selecting the components, you can also change the  
machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network,  
set the machine as the default machine, and change the port  
name of each machine. Click Next.  
Items to prepare  
Access point  
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print  
Network-connected computer  
13 a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
a test page.  
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 15.  
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
14  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
Access point via USB cable  
To register as a user of the machine in order to receive  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
15 information from Samsung, click On-line Registration.  
1
2
3
4
Click Finish.  
16  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
5
6
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
 
2. Using a network-connected machine  
43  
Wireless network setup  
Enter the password and click OK.  
After searching, the window shows the wireless network  
7
8
9
10  
15 devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are  
using and click Next.  
Click Continue.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click  
Advanced Setting.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the  
access point you want with (SSID is case-sensitive).  
Click Continue.  
11  
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is  
12 recommended for most users. All components necessary for  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption  
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data  
security.  
machine operations will be installed.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose which individual  
operations will be installed.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a  
proper WEP key can access the network.  
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to  
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared  
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre-  
Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually configured on  
the access point and each of its clients.  
Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.  
13  
14  
The software searches the wireless network.  
Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,  
WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP, AES)  
If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is  
connected between the computer and machine properly,  
and follow the instructions in the window.  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network  
key value.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select  
the appropriate WEP Key Index.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
44  
Wireless network setup  
The wireless network security window appears when the  
access point has security setting.  
The window shows the wireless network settings and check if  
16 settings are right. Click Next.  
The wireless network security window appears. The window  
may differ according to its security mode: WEP or WPA.  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if  
DHCP is shown in the window. If it shows Static, click  
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to  
DHCP.  
WEP  
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication  
and enter the WEP security key. Click Next.  
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol  
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.  
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged  
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP  
encryption key.  
For the Static method  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if  
Static is shown in the window. If it shows DHCP, click  
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network  
configuration values for the machine. Before entering the  
IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s  
network configuration information. If the computer is set  
to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to  
get the static IP address.  
WPA  
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.  
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key  
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also  
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES  
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.  
For example:  
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as  
follows:  
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
45  
Wireless network setup  
-
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet  
mask.)  
USB cable  
Creating the ad hoc network in Macintosh  
-
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
Turn on your computer and machine.  
The wireless network connects according to the network  
1
2
3
4
17 configuration.  
When the wireless network settings are completed,  
18 disconnect the USB cable between the computer and  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
machine.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the  
19 installation. After the installation is finished, click Quit or  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK.  
Restart.  
5
6
7
8
9
Ad hoc via USB cable  
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the  
machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc  
wireless network by following these simple directions.  
Click Continue.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
Items to prepare  
Network-connected computer  
10  
Software CD that provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
46  
Wireless network setup  
Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is  
11 recommended for most users. All components necessary for  
If you want to change ad hoc settings click the Advanced  
Setting button.  
machine operations will be installed.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual  
operations will be installed.  
you want (SSID is case-sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.  
Click Wireless Setting and Installation.  
Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz  
12  
13  
to 2467 MHz).  
The software searches the wireless network devices.  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption  
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data  
security.  
If the search has failed, check if the USB cable is connected  
between the computer and machine properly, and follow  
the instructions in the window.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a  
proper WEP key can access the network.  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64,  
WEP128).  
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless  
14 networks your machine has searched appears.  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network  
If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting, select  
the last wireless network on the list, which Network  
Name(SSID) is portthru and Signal is Printer Self Network.  
key value.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select  
the appropriate WEP Key Index.  
Then, click Next.  
If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another  
wireless network from the list.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
47  
Wireless network setup  
The wireless network security window appears when the ad  
hoc network has security setting.  
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open  
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.  
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol  
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.  
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged  
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP  
encryption key.  
The window showing the wireless network settings appears.  
15 Check the settings and click Next.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
48  
Wireless network setup  
- IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must  
know the computer’s network configuration information. If  
the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the  
wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if  
the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the  
wireless network setting should also be Static.  
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet  
mask.)  
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
The wireless network connects according to the network  
16 configuration.  
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static  
wireless network setting, you must contact the network  
administrator to get the static IP address.  
When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect  
17 the USB cable between the computer and machine.  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if  
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm  
window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change  
the assignment method to Receive IP address  
automatically (DHCP).  
Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the  
18 installation. After the installation is finished, click Quit or  
Restart.  
18  
For the Static method  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if  
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm  
window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter  
the IP address and other network configuration values for  
the machine.  
Using a network cable  
ꢀ  
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your  
machine to work with your network, you will need to perform some  
configuration procedures.  
For example:  
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:  
- IP address: 169.254.133.42  
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as  
below:  
   
2. Using a network-connected machine  
49  
Wireless network setup  
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)  
• After completing the wireless network connection, you  
need to install a machine driver to print from an  
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your  
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine.  
The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network  
interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report.  
• See your network administrator, or the person that set up  
your wireless network, for information about your  
network configuration.  
Configuring the machine’s wireless network  
Items to prepare  
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of  
your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This  
information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was  
installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment,  
please ask the person who set up your network.  
Access point  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
Network cable  
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web  
Service.  
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Printing a network configuration report  
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable  
connection status.  
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a  
network configuration report.  
 
2. Using a network-connected machine  
50  
Wireless network setup  
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the  
machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network  
cable.  
1
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network  
configuration. However, if you want to set the wireless  
network directly, select Custom.  
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox  
and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser  
window.  
2
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.  
7
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a  
For example,  
wireless network, access points, and wireless devices  
attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must  
use the same SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service  
website.  
3
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of  
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
4
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate  
ID: admin  
directly with each other in a peer-to-peer environment.  
Password: sec00000  
-
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to  
communicate with each other through an access point.  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click  
5
6
Network Settings.  
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select  
the SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-  
hoc, select the machine’s SSID. Note that “portthru” is the  
default SSID of your machine.  
Click Wireless > Wizard.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
51  
Wireless network setup  
Click Next.  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service  
website.  
8
3
4
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the  
registered password (network key) and click Next.  
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless  
setup. If the setup is right, click Apply.  
ID: admin  
9
Password: sec00000  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click  
Network Settings.  
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your  
machine should then start communicating wirelessly with  
the network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless  
LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.  
5
6
Click Wireless > Custom.  
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.  
19  
20  
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off  
ꢀ  
Troubleshooting  
ꢀ  
Check whether the network cable is connected to the  
machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network  
cable.  
1
2
Problems during setup or driver installation  
Printers Not Found  
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox  
and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser  
window.  
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and  
the machine.  
USB cable is not connected between your computer and  
machine. Connect machine to your computer using the USB  
cable.  
For example,  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
52  
Wireless network setup  
The machine does not support a wireless network. Check the  
machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied  
with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine.  
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security  
You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured  
security on your access point and machine.  
Connecting Failure - Not Found SSID  
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error  
The machine is unable to search the network name (SSID) you  
have selected or entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your  
access point and try connecting again.  
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine.  
Check the USB cable and your machine’s power.  
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.  
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network  
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove  
the wired network cable from your machine.  
PC Connection Error  
The configured network address is unable to connect between  
your computer and machine.  
-
For a DHCP network environment  
The receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when  
computer is configured to DHCP.  
-
For a Static network environment  
The machine uses the static address when the computer is  
configured to static address.  
For example:  
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:  
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
53  
Wireless network setup  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the  
communication.  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:  
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same  
network and it cannot be found when searching, firewall  
software might be blocking the communication. Refer to the  
user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the  
machine again.  
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet  
mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly.  
You can check the IP address by printing the network  
configuration report.  
Other problems  
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the  
following:  
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a  
configured security (password). If it has a password, refer to the  
access point (or wireless router) administrator.  
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer  
to its own user's guide.  
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and  
change the settings to connect to the machine on the network.  
Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could  
change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access  
point has been reset.  
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may  
not be turned on.  
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to  
connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where  
you need to type in a user's information before connecting to  
access point (or wireless router).  
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is  
far from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have  
difficulty receiving the signal.  
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine,  
and computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover  
network communication.  
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other  
wireless communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not  
supported.  
2. Using a network-connected machine  
54  
Wireless network setup  
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as  
Windows Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection  
setting every time you use the wireless machine.  
You cannot use Infrastructure mode and Ad hoc mode at the  
same time for Samsung wireless network machines.  
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.  
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the  
wireless signal.  
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or  
wireless router) and the machine.  
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless  
router) are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns  
containing metal or concrete.  
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that  
may interfere with the wireless signal.  
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a  
microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices.  
3. Useful setting menus  
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the  
method of setting for advanced machine setup.  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the  
machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed  
by pressing (Menu).  
• An asterisk (*) appears next to the currently selected menu.  
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
• For models that do not have the display screen on the control panel,  
this feature is not applicable.  
• Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its  
options or the models.  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
56  
Print menu  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
To change the menu options:  
Press Menu > Print Setup on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Print Setup on the touch  
screen.  
Item  
Description  
Selects the direction in which information is  
printed on a page.  
Orientation  
You can enter the number of copies using the  
number keypad.  
Copies  
Specifies the number of dots printed per inch  
(dpi). The higher the setting, the sharper printed  
characters and graphics.  
Resolution  
Lightens or darkens the print on the page. The  
Normal setting usually produces the best result.  
Use the Light toner density setting to save toner.  
Darkness  
Darken Text  
Emulation  
Prints text darker than on a normal document.  
Sets the emulation type and option.  
   
3. Useful setting menus  
57  
Copy menu  
1
Item  
Description  
Copy Feature  
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy  
that is easier to read, when the original  
contains faint markings and dark images.  
Darkness  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Adjusts the contrast level to scan an original  
that is easier to read, when the original  
contains too faint or too dark contents.  
Contrast  
To change the menu options:  
Improves the copy quality by selecting the  
document type for the current copy job.  
Original Type  
Press  
(copy) > Menu > Copy Feature on the control panel.  
Original  
Orientation  
Sets the original image’s orientation.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Copy  
Default on the touch screen.  
Adjusts the layout format such as poster, clone,  
ID copy, 2/4-up, booklet, etc.  
Or press Copy > select the menu item you want on the touch  
screen. You can use the following copy features on the touch  
screen.  
Layout  
Item  
Scan Size  
Description  
Sets the image size.  
Original Size  
You can enter the number of copies using the  
number keypad.  
Copies  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.  
       
3. Useful setting menus  
58  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For  
example, if you make 2 copies of a 3 page  
original, one complete 3 page document will  
print followed by a second complete  
document.  
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster  
2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of  
paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
This copy feature is available only when you  
place originals on the scanner glass.  
On: Prints output in sets to match the  
sequence of originals.  
Poster Copy  
Copy Collation  
Collate Copy  
Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of  
individual pages.  
Prints multiple original images on a single  
page. The number of images is automatically  
determined by the original image and the  
paper size.  
Reduces the size of the original images and  
prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper.  
This copy feature is available only when you  
load originals into the document feeder.  
This copy feature is available only when you  
place originals on the scanner glass.  
Clone Copy  
2-up or 4-up  
Copying  
1
2
N-up Copy  
3
4
3. Useful setting menus  
59  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an  
entire book. If the book is too thick, lift the  
cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper  
and then close the cover. If the book or  
magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying  
with the cover open.  
The machine automatically prints on one or  
both sides of the paper, which are then folded  
to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the  
correct sequence.  
The machine will reduce and correctly adjust  
the position of each image to fit on the selected  
paper.  
Booklet  
This copy feature is available only when you  
place originals on the scanner glass.  
Book Copy  
Prints an image without its background. This  
copy feature removes the background color  
and can be helpful when copying an original  
containing color in the background, such as a  
newspaper or a catalog.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Left Page: Use this option to print left page  
of the book.  
Right Page: Use this option to print right  
page of the book.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Adjust Bkgd  
Both Page: Use this option to print both  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
pages of the book.  
Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is,  
the more vivid the background is.  
Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is,  
the lighter the background is.  
3. Useful setting menus  
60  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Allows you to create a binding edge for the  
document. The image can be adjusted up or  
down on the page and/or shifted to the right or  
left.  
Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold  
creases and staple marks along any of the four  
edges of a document.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Margin Shift  
copying  
Auto Center: Automatically copy in the  
center of the paper. This feature is available  
only when you place originals on the  
scanner glass.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Small Original: rases the edge of the  
original if it is small. This feature is available  
only when you place originals on the  
scanner glass.  
Custom Margin: Enter the left, right, top,  
Edge Erase  
copying  
bottom margin using Number keypad.  
Hole Punch: Erases the marks of  
bookbinding holes.  
Book Center: Erases the middle part of the  
paper which is black and horizontal, when  
you copy a book. This feature is available  
only when you place originals on the  
scanner glass.  
Border Erase: Enter the left, right, top,  
bottom margin using Number keypad.  
Gray Eenhance  
copying  
When you make a copy in gray scale, use this  
feature to get better quality of copy-output.  
3. Useful setting menus  
61  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
The watermark option allows you to print text  
over an existing document. For example, you  
use it when you want to have large gray letters  
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed  
diagonally across the first page or all pages of a  
document. Enter a text message in the  
Message option, and assign the page on which  
you want to print.  
2->1Side  
2->2Side  
Watermark  
copying  
Duplex (continue)  
2->1Side ROT2  
print copies on both sides of paper.  
Off: Prints in normal mode.  
1->2Side Short  
2
Copy Setup  
2
To change the menu options:  
Duplex  
3
5
Press  
Item  
Change Default  
(copy) > Menu > Copy Setup on the control panel.  
1->2Side Long  
Description  
Resets the value or setting to the printer’s out-  
of-box state.  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
62  
Fax menu  
3
Item  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Description  
Fax Feature  
The default document settings proceduce  
good results when using typical text-based  
originals. However, if you send originals that  
are of poor quality, or contain photographs,  
you can adjust the resolution to produce a  
higher quality fax.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
To change the menu options:  
prints the received fax on both sides of paper.  
Sends a fax to multiple destinations.  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Feature on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax  
Default on the touch screen.  
Multi Send  
You cannot send a color fax using  
this feature.  
Or press Fax > select the menu item you want on the touch  
screen.  
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time  
when you will not be present.  
Item  
Scan Size  
Description  
Sets the image size.  
Delay Send  
You cannot send a color fax using  
this feature.  
Original Size  
Adjusts the contrast level to scan an original  
that is easier to read, when the original  
contains too faint or too dark contents.  
Contrast  
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original  
that is easier to read, when the original  
contains faint markings and dark images.  
Darkness  
       
3. Useful setting menus  
63  
Fax menu  
4
Item  
Description  
Sending Setup  
Scans the original into memory and  
immediately transmits it when the current  
operation is finished. Priority transmission will  
interrupt a sending to multiple destinations  
between stations (example, when the  
transmission to station A ends, before  
transmission to station B begins) or between  
redial attempts.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Priority Send  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
panel.  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Setup > Sending on the control  
Forwards the received or sent fax to other  
destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you  
are out of office but have to receive the fax, this  
feature may be useful.  
Forward  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax  
Default on the touch screen.  
Stores the received fax in memory without  
printing out. To print received documents, you  
need to enter the password. You can prevent  
your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people.  
Item  
Description  
Secure Receive  
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter  
0, the machine will not redial.  
Redial Times  
Sets the time interval before automatic  
redialling.  
Adds additional documents to a reserved delay  
fax job.  
Redial Term  
Prefix Dial  
Add Page  
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number  
dials before any automatic dial number is  
started. It is useful for accessing a PABX  
exchange.  
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in  
memory.  
Cancel Job  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
64  
Fax menu  
5
Item  
Description  
Receiving Setup  
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM)  
to makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly  
without any error. It may take more time.  
ECM Mode  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Prints a confirmation report showing whether a  
transmission was successful, how many pages  
were sent, and more.  
Send Report  
Image TCR  
Dial Mode  
To change the menu options:  
Prints a transmission report with a minimized  
image of the first page of the fax sent.  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control  
panel.  
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse.  
This setting may not be available depending on  
your country.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax  
Default on the touch screen.  
Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save  
on call costs. This setting may not be available  
depending on your country.  
Toll Save  
Item  
Description  
Receive Mode  
Selects the default fax receiving mode.  
Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax  
options such as Machine ID, Fax Number, etc.  
Setup Wizard  
Specifies the number of times the machine  
rings before answering an incoming call.  
Ring To Answer  
Automatically prints the page number, and the  
date and time of reception at the bottom of  
each page of a received fax.  
Stamp RCV Name  
Stamp Rcvd Name  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
65  
Fax menu  
Item  
Description  
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone  
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the  
machine. If you pick up the extension phone  
and hear fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to  
*9* at the factory.  
Rcv Start Code  
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to  
fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine.  
Auto Reduction  
Discard Size  
Discards a specific length from the end of the  
received fax.  
Blocks any unwanted faxes that you stored in  
the memory as junk fax numbers. This setting  
may not be available depending on your  
country.  
Junk Fax Setup  
DRPD Mode  
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers.  
You can set the machine to recognize different  
ring patterns for each number. This setting may  
not be available depending on your country.  
Prints the received fax data on both sides of the  
paper. You can save the paper usage.  
Duplex Print  
Doc Box Saving  
Stores received faxes in the common box. This  
menu only appears when an optional hard disk  
drive has been installed.  
Document Box  
Saving  
3. Useful setting menus  
66  
Scan menu  
6
Item  
Description  
Scan Feature  
Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan  
the originals and send the scanned image to an  
FTP server.  
FTP Default  
FTP  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You  
scan the originals and send the scanned image  
to an SMB server.  
SMB Default  
SMB  
To change the menu options:  
Prints a confirmation report showing whether  
the scanned image sending was successful.  
Send Report  
Local PC  
Press  
(Scan) > Menu > Scan Feature on the control panel.  
Sets scan destination to a usb-connected  
computer. You scan the originals and save the  
scanned image to a directory such as My  
Documents.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Scan  
Default on the touch screen.  
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch  
screen.  
Sets scan destination to a network-connected  
computer. You scan the originals and save the  
scanned image to a directory such as My  
Documents.  
Network PC  
Item  
Description  
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the  
originals and save the scanned image to a USB  
device.  
USB Default  
USB  
Sets scan destination to a Document Box. You  
scan the originals and send the scanned image  
to the storage which called Document Box in  
the machine.  
Document Box  
Shared Boxes  
Email Default  
Send Email  
Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the  
originals and email the scanned image to  
destinations.  
Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You  
can create and use the shared folder (see  
Custom Email  
   
3. Useful setting menus  
67  
Scan menu  
7
Item  
Contrast  
Description  
Scan Setup  
Adjust the contrast level to scan lighter or  
darker than the original.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(Scan) > Menu > Scan Setup on the control panel.  
Orpress Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Scan  
Default on the touch screen.  
Item  
Scan Size  
Description  
Sets the image size.  
Original Size  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Sets the original document’s type.  
Sets the image resolution.  
Sets the color mode.  
Color Mode  
Sets the file format in which the image is to be  
saved. If you select BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or PDF, you  
can select to scan multiple pages.  
File Format  
Darkness  
Adjusts the brightness level to scan.  
   
3. Useful setting menus  
68  
System setup  
8
Item  
Description  
Machine Setup  
Off: Prints in normal mode.  
Single Form: Prints all page using the first  
form.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Form Menu  
Double Form: Prints the front page using the  
first form and the back page using the second  
form.  
To change the menu options:  
Form overlay is images stored on the printer’s  
hard disk as a special file format that can be  
printed in layers on any document.  
Press Menu > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control  
Select Form  
panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup on the touch  
screen.  
When On, stores documents on the hard disk  
drive (HDD) for network printing.  
HDD Spooling  
Language  
Sets the language of the text that appears on the  
control panel display.  
Item  
Description  
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the  
top of each fax page that you send.  
Sets the machine’s default mode among fax  
mode, copy mode, or scan mode.  
Machine ID  
Default Mode  
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the  
top of each fax page that you send.  
Default Paper  
Size  
You can set the default paper size to use.  
Fax Number  
Date & Time  
Clock Mode  
Sets the date and time.  
Sets how long the machine waits before going to  
power save mode.  
Selects the format for displaying time between  
12 hr and 24 hr.  
Power Save  
When the machine does not receive data for an  
extended period of time, power consumption is  
automatically lowered.  
     
3. Useful setting menus  
69  
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Sets how long the machine’s scanner part waits  
before going to power save mode.  
Determine whether or not the machine  
continues printing when it detects the paper  
does not match the paper settings.  
Scan PWR Save  
When the scanner does not receive data for an  
extended period of time, power consumption is  
automatically lowered.  
Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine  
Auto Continue  
Altitude Adj.  
waits until you insert the correct paper.  
On: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error  
message will display. The machine waits for  
about 30 second, then automatically clear the  
message and continue printing.  
Sets the time that the machine remembers  
System Timeout previously used copy settings. After the timeout,  
the machine restores the dafault copy settings.  
Sets the length of time the printer waits before  
printing the last page of a print job that does not  
end with a command to print the page.  
Optimize print quality according to the  
machine’s altitude.  
Job Timeout  
Altitude  
Adjustment  
You can set the condition to wake up from  
power-save mode. Set the item on.  
Allows you to append the required carriage  
return to each line feed, which is useful for Unix  
or DOS users.  
Auto CR  
Button Press: When you press any button  
except power button, the machine wake up  
from the power save mode.  
Wakeup Event  
Firmware  
Version  
Shows the product’s firmware version.  
Printer: When you open or close the paper  
tray, the machine wake up from the power  
save mode.  
Provides sugestions while you type an email  
address or fax number. This enables you to find  
and select the data without typing it in  
completely.  
AutoComplete  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
70  
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Determine whether or not the machine  
continues printing when it detects the paper  
does not match.  
Clean Drum: Cleans the OPC drum of the  
Tray Chaining  
cartridge by printing a sheet.  
Auto Tray Switch  
Clean Fuser: Cleans the fuser by printing a  
sheet.  
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s  
paper size to prevent the paper mismatch  
between Letter and A4. For example, if you have  
A4 paper in the tray but you set the paper size to  
Letter in the printer driver, the machine prints on  
A4 paper and vice versa.  
CLR Empty Msg.: This option appears only  
when toner cartridge is empty.  
Paper  
Substitution  
Supplies Info.: Allows you to check how  
many pages are printed and how much toner  
is left in the cartridge.  
TonerLow Alert: If toner in the cartridge has  
run out, a message informing the user to  
change the toner cartridge appears. You can  
set the option for this message to appear or  
not.  
Determine whether to disregard the paper  
mismatch error or not. Select Off, then the  
machine does not stop printing even if the paper  
mismatches.  
Maintenance  
Paper Mismatch  
The printer detects the printing data from  
Print Blank Page computer whether a page is empty or not. You  
Paper Stacking: If you use a machine in a  
humid area, or you are using the damp print  
media caused by a high humidity, the print-  
outs on the output tray may be curled and  
may not be stacked properly. In this case, you  
can set the machine to use this function to let  
print-outs stacked firmly. But, using this  
function will make the print speed slow.  
can set to print or skip the blank page.  
Mode: Selects the mult-bin mode you want to  
use.  
Multi-Bin  
Default Bin: Selects the bin to use as a default.  
Default Source  
Address Book  
Sets the tray to use as a default.  
Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to  
the machine.  
Import Setting  
Views or prints the phonebook or email address  
list.  
3. Useful setting menus  
71  
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Exports data stored on a USB memory stick to the  
machine.  
Clear Setting  
Restores the machine’s factory default settings.  
Export Setting  
Toner Save  
9
Activating this mode extends the life of your  
toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page  
beyond what one would experience in the  
normal mode, but it reduces print quality.  
Paper Setup  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
You can reduce the printing noise by turning this  
menu on. However, the printing speed and  
quality may be declined.  
Quiet Mode  
Allows you to save print resources and enables  
eco-friendly printing.  
To change the menu options:  
Press Menu > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control  
Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco  
panel.  
mode on or off.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Paper Setup on the touch  
screen.  
Eco  
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco  
mode on with password. If a user  
wants to turn the Eco mode on/off, the  
user needs to enter the password.  
Eco Setup  
Item  
Description  
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper  
sizes, according to your requirements.  
Paper Size  
Change Template: Selects the eco template  
Paper Type  
Paper Source  
Margin  
Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.  
Selects from which tray the paper is used.  
Sets the margins for the document.  
set from the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Barcode  
FreeScape  
You can set the freescape for barcodes. Enable  
this option to set the freescape code.  
3. Useful setting menus  
72  
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Activates the tray confirmation message. If you  
open and close a tray, a window asking you  
whether to set the paper size and type for the  
tray just opened appears.  
Turns the alarm sound on or off. With this option  
set to on, an alarm tone sounds when an error  
occurs or fax communication ends.  
Alarm Sound  
Tray Confirm  
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone  
line through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a  
fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which  
means the speaker is on until the remote  
machine answers.  
10  
Sound / Volume  
Speaker  
Ringer  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
You can adjust the volume level using  
On Hook Dial.  
To change the menu options:  
Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer  
volume, you can select off, low, middle, and high  
level.  
Press Menu > System Setup > Sound/Volume on the control  
panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup > Sound/  
11  
Volume on the touch screen.  
Report  
Item  
Description  
Turns the key sound on or off. With this option  
set to on, a tone sounds each time a key is  
pressed.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Key Sound  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
73  
System setup  
To change the menu options:  
Item  
Description  
Press Menu > System Setup > Report on the control panel.  
Prints a transmission report including the fax  
number, the number of pages, the elapsed  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Reports on the touch screen.  
time of the job, the communication mode, and  
the communication results for fax job. You can  
set up your machine to automatically print a  
transmission confirmation report after each fax  
job.  
Fax Send  
Item  
Description  
Prints the menu map which shows the layout  
and current settings of this machine.  
Menu Map  
Prints all kinds of reports that this machine  
provides.  
Prints information on the faxes you have  
recently sent. You can set the machine to  
automatically print this report every 50  
communications.  
All Reports  
Fax Sent  
Prints a report on the machine's overall  
configuration.  
Configuration  
Supplies Info.  
Prints information on the faxes you have  
recently received.  
Prints supplies’ information page.  
Fax Received  
Supplies  
Prints information on the emails you have  
recently sent. You can set the machine to  
automatically print this report every 50  
communications.  
Information  
Email Sent  
Prints all of the email addresses currently  
stored in the machine’s memory.  
Address Book  
Demo Page  
Prints the demo page to check whether your  
machine is printing properly or not.  
Scheduled Jobs  
Prints the document list currently stored for  
delayed faxes along with the starting time and  
type of each operation.  
Fax Scheduled  
Jobs  
Prints the fax numbers specified as junk fax  
numbers.  
JunkFax  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
74  
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Network Conf.  
Prints information on your machine’s network  
connection and configuration.  
Stored Job List  
Stored Jobs  
Prints jobs currently stored in the optional  
memory or on a hard disk (HDD).  
Network  
Configuration  
Completed Job  
Completed Jobs  
Prints list of completed jobs.  
User Auth  
Prints the authorized users who are allowed to  
use the email function.  
Local User  
Authentication  
This is used only available when Job  
Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru™  
Web Admin Service. You can print a report of  
printout counts for each user.  
Accounting Report  
Accounting  
PCL Font  
Prints the PCL font list.  
PS Font  
Prints the PS/PS3 font list.  
PS3 Font  
12  
EPSON Font  
KSC5843 Font  
KSC5895 Font  
KSSM Font  
Prints the EPSON font list.  
Prints the KS font list.  
Maintenance  
Prints the KS5895 font list.  
Prints the KSSM font list.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Net User Auth  
Prints the users and their IDs who logged in the  
domain.  
Network User  
To change the menu options:  
Authentication  
Press Menu > System Setup > Maintenance on the control  
Prints a u16  
panel.  
Usage Counter  
Fax Options  
sage page. The usage page contains the total  
number of pages printed.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup on the touch  
screen.  
Prints the information of a fax reports.  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
75  
System setup  
13  
Item  
Description  
Clear Setting  
When toner cartridge is empty, this option  
appears. You can clear the empty message.  
CLR Empty Msg.  
Ignore Toner  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
You can set the machine to ingore the toner  
empty message and continue printing except  
incoming faxes.  
To change the menu options:  
Supplies Life  
Shows the supply life indicators.  
Press Menu > System Setup > Clear Setting on the control  
panel.  
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner  
empty.  
Toner Low Alert  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Restore Options on the  
touch screen.  
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you  
call for service or register as a user on the  
Samsung website, you can find this.  
Serial Number  
Paper Stacking  
Color  
Item  
Description  
Enables the automatic linking feature for trays.  
when one tray is not available for paper empty or  
mismatch, this option allows your printer to feed  
paper from another available tray.  
Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets  
all of your settings to the factory default.  
All Setting  
Restores all of the printer options to the factory  
default.  
Printer Setup  
Paper Setup  
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as  
contrast level, color registration, color density,  
etc.  
Restores all of the paper options to the factory  
default.  
Sets some part of ram disk to the job storage  
area. Using the storage area activates the job  
manage menu (see "Job Manage" on page 76).  
This allows the data from your computer to be  
sent to the print queue of the ram disk.  
Restores all of the tray behaviour settings to the  
factory default.  
Tray Behaviour  
Ram Disk  
3. Useful setting menus  
76  
System setup  
14  
Item  
Description  
Job Manage  
Fax Setup  
Restores all of the fax options to the factory  
default.  
Fax Default  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Copy Setup  
Restores all of the copy options to the factory  
default.  
Copy Default  
Scan Setup  
Restores all of the scan options to the factory  
default.  
To change the menu options:  
Scan Default  
Press Menu > System Setup > Job Manage on the control  
Restores all of the system options to the factory  
default.  
panel.  
System Setup  
Network Setup  
Address Book  
Restores all of the network options to the factory  
default. (Reboot required.)  
Item  
Description  
Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be  
printed.  
Active Job  
Clears all of the email address entries stored in  
memory.  
Shows the print job lists that are stored on the  
disk.  
Store Job  
File Policy  
Fax Sent  
Clears all records of sent faxes.  
Sent Report  
If the memory already has the same name when  
you entered a new file name, you can rename or  
overwrite it.  
Email Sent  
Clears all records of sent emails.  
Clears all records of received faxes.  
Fax Rcv Report  
Rcvd Report  
 
3. Useful setting menus  
77  
System setup  
15  
Option  
Description  
ImageOverwrite  
Show Space  
Shows the remaining space.  
Press Menu > System Setup > ImageOverwrite on the control  
17  
panel.  
Emulation setup  
Item  
Manual  
Description  
You can overwrite the embedded USB memory  
to clear all of the data stored in.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
16  
To change the menu options:  
Press Menu > Print Setup > Emulation on the control panel.  
USB setup  
Press USB on the touch screen.  
Item  
Description  
Option  
Description  
The machine language defines how the  
computer communicates with the machine.  
Emulation Type  
Print From  
Views the file list from the File Navigation.  
Select a file to print.  
Sets the detailed settings for the selected  
emulation type.  
Setup  
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the  
originals and save the scanned image to a USB  
device.  
Scan to USB  
File Manage  
Views the file list from the File Navigation.  
Select a file to delete. You can format the USB  
device.  
   
3. Useful setting menus  
78  
System setup  
18  
19  
Email setup  
Address book setup  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
To change the menu options:  
To change the menu options:  
Press Setup > Machine Setup > Email Setup on the touch  
Press Setup > Machine Setup > Address Book on the touch  
screen.  
screen.  
Option  
Description  
Option  
Description  
SMTP Server  
Sets the SMTP server configuration.  
Adds, views, prints or deletes the the phonebook  
list. You also can create a group.  
PhoneBook  
Sets to send the mail to yourself so that you can  
back up the email or use as a reminder.  
Send to Self  
Adds, views, prints or deletes the the email list.  
You also can create a group.  
Email  
Default To  
Address  
Sets an email destination address as a default  
one.  
20  
Default From  
Sets a sender’s email address as a default one.  
Sets an email’s subject as a default one.  
Document Box setup  
Default Subject  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
     
3. Useful setting menus  
79  
System setup  
21  
Doc Box Feature  
Network setup  
To change the menu options:  
Press Menu > Document Box > Doc Box Feature on the control  
panel.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Option  
Description  
To change the menu options:  
Add From Scan  
Stores scanned documents in a box. The stored  
file will be named automatically as  
"yearmonthdayhourminutesecond".  
Press Menu > Network on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Network Setup on the touch  
Task From Box  
Prints a document from a box.  
screen.  
Doc Box Setup  
Option  
Description  
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure  
parameters to use the network environment.  
To change the menu options:  
Press Menu > Document Box > Doc Box Setup on the control  
panel.  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
There are lots of parameters to be set.  
If you are not sure, leave as is, or  
consult the network administrator.  
Option  
Description  
Sets the default options for storing the  
document to a box.  
Add From Scan  
Selects this option to use the network  
environment through IPv6 (see "IPv6  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
Sets the default options for printing the  
document from a box.  
Task From Box  
Ethernet Speed  
Configure the network transmission speed.  
   
3. Useful setting menus  
80  
System setup  
Option  
Description  
You can selects the user authentication for  
network communication. For detailed  
802.1x  
information consult the network administrator.  
Wireless  
Selects this option to use the wireless network.  
Reverts the network settings to the default  
values. (Reboot required.)  
Clear Setting  
Network Conf.  
(Network  
This list shows information on your machine’s  
network connection and configuration.  
Configuration)  
Net. Activate  
Http Activate  
You can sets whether to use Ethernet on or off.  
You can sets whether to use SyncThru™ Web  
Service or not.  
3. Useful setting menus  
81  
Custom setup  
This menu appears only when the XOA (eXtensible Open  
Architecture) web application is installed. Contact the administrator  
to use this menu.  
To change the menu options:  
Press Menu > Custom on the control panel.  
   
4. Special features  
This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features.  
• The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.  
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
 
4. Special features  
83  
Altitude adjustment  
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is  
determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The  
following information will guide you on how to set your machine for  
the best print quality.  
• If your machine is connected to the network, you can set  
the altitude via SyncThru™ Web Service.  
• You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on  
the machine’s display.  
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you  
are.  
4,000 m  
(13,123 ft)  
1
3,000 m  
(9,842 ft)  
2
2,000 m  
(6,561 ft)  
1 High 3  
2 High 2  
3 High 1  
4 Normal  
3
4
1,000 m  
(3,280 ft)  
0
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings or Machine  
section in Printer Settings Utlity program.  
For Macintosh, Linux, or Unix OS user, see "Using Smart Panel  
   
4. Special features  
84  
Changing the font setting  
Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.  
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition,  
such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting from  
Emulation section in Printer Settings Utility program.  
For Macintosh, Linux, or Unix OS user, see "Using Smart Panel  
• If your machine is connected to the network, you can set  
the font setting via SyncThru™ Web Service.  
• You can also change the font setting in Emulation option  
on the machine’s display.  
• The following information shows the proper font list for  
corresponding languages.  
- Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic  
- Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)  
- Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek  
- Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code  
Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic  
- OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B  
   
4. Special features  
85  
Storing email address  
You can set up address book with the email addresses you use  
frequently via SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly  
enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to  
them in address book.  
Click Apply.  
6
7
If you make a group, click Address Book > E-mail Group >  
Add Group.  
1
Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name.  
8
Storing on your local machine  
• You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for  
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™  
Add individual(s) after this group is created.  
1
Click Apply.  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service  
website.  
9
2
2
Searching for an address  
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
3
ID: admin  
Searching sequentially through memory  
Password: sec00000  
Select  
(Scan) > Address Book > Search & Send > Select an  
Click Address Book > Individual > Add.  
1
2
4
5
address group > All on the control panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book >  
Email > View List > Individual or Group on the touch screen.  
Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax  
number.  
Search upwards or downwards through the entire memory in  
index (numerical) order, and select the name and address you  
want.  
• If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB  
or FTP and set the information.  
       
4. Special features  
86  
Storing email address  
Searching with a particular first letter  
Select  
(Scan) > Address Book > Search & Send > Select an  
1
address group > ID on the control panel.  
Enter the first few letters of the name you want.  
2
3
Search upwards or downwards, and select the name and  
address you want.  
4. Special features  
87  
Entering various characters  
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and  
numbers. For example, when you set up your machine, you enter  
your name or your company’s name, and the fax number. When you  
store fax numbers or email addresses in memory, you may also enter  
the corresponding names.  
Key  
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
@ / . ‘ 1  
A B C a b c 2  
D E F d e f 3  
3
G H I g h i 4  
Entering alphanumeric characters  
J K L j k l 5  
M N O m n o 6  
P Q R S p q r s 7  
T U V t u v 8  
W X Y Z w x y z 9  
& + - , 0  
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For  
example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time  
you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and  
finally 6. To find the letter that you want to enter, see "Keypad letters  
• You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.  
* % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]  
• To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or  
up/down arrow button.  
*
(These symbols are available when you type for  
network authentication.)  
# = | ? " : { } < > ;  
4
#
(These symbols are available when you type for  
network authentication.)  
Keypad letters and numbers  
Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on  
its options or the models.  
     
4. Special features  
88  
Setting up the address book  
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use  
frequently via SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly  
enter fax numbers by entering the location numbers assigned to  
them in address book.  
Press the  
mode.  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button to return to ready  
5
6
Using speed dial numbers  
5
Registering a speed dial number  
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while  
sending a fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the  
number you want.  
Select  
(Fax) > Address Book > New & Edit > Speed Dial  
1
2
on the control panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book >  
• For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the  
corresponding digit button on the number keypad.  
Phone Book > View List > Individual >  
Add on the touch screen.  
(options) >  
• For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first  
digit button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.  
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.  
• You can print the address book list by selecting  
(Fax)  
> Address Book > Print.  
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the  
display shows the message to allow you to change it. To start  
over with another speed dial number, press  
(Back).  
Enter the name you want and press OK.  
3
4
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.  
       
4. Special features  
89  
Setting up the address book  
7
8
Editing speed dial numbers  
Registering a group dial number  
Select  
on the control panel.  
(Fax) > Address Book > New & Edit > Speed Dial  
Select  
on the control panel.  
(Fax) > Address Book > New & Edit > Group Dial  
1
1
2
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book >  
Phone Book > View List > Individual on the touch screen.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next >Address Book >  
Phone Book > View List > Group>  
the touch screen.  
(options) > Add on  
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
Change the name and press OK.  
2
3
4
5
Enter a group dial number and press OK.  
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the  
display shows the message to allow you to change it. To start  
over with another speed dial number, press  
Change the fax number and press OK.  
(Back).  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s  
name to put in the group.  
3
Select the name and number you want and press OK.  
4
5
6
Select Yes when Another Number? appears.  
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the  
group.  
   
4. Special features  
90  
Setting up the address book  
When you have finished, select No when Another Number?  
appears and press OK.  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
7
7
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
8
9
Editing group dial numbers  
Select  
on the control panel.  
(Fax) > Address Book > New & Edit > Group Dial  
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book >  
Phone Book > View List > Group on the touch screen.  
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
2
3
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then  
Add? appears.  
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK,  
Delete? appears.  
Press OK to add or delete the number.  
4
5
6
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.  
Select No at the Another Number? and press OK.  
 
4. Special features  
91  
Registering authorized users  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the  
network parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over  
the network. To send a scanned image through email or via network  
server safely, you must register account information of authorized  
users to your local machine using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-  
mail Address, and Fax Number.  
8
9
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for  
Add individual(s) after this group is created.  
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™  
1
Click Apply.  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service  
website.  
2
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
3
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication.  
4
5
Select Local Authentication in the the Authentication  
Method, and click Apply.  
Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window.  
6
7
Click User Profile > Add.  
   
4. Special features  
92  
Printing features  
10  
11  
Changing the default print settings  
Setting your machine as a default machine  
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.  
Select your machine.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.  
Right-click on your machine.  
Select Printing preferences.  
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.  
If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer  
If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer  
drivers connected to the selected printer.  
drivers connected to the selected printer.  
Change the settings on each tab.  
5
6
Click OK.  
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change  
it in Printing Preferences.  
       
4. Special features  
93  
Printing features  
12  
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.  
1
Using advanced print features  
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.  
• The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows  
Vista OS or higher.  
• You can install the XPS printer driver when you insert the  
software CD into your CD-ROM drive. When the  
installation window appears, select Advanced  
Installation > Custom Installation. You can select the  
XPS printer driver in the Select Software and Utilities to  
Install window.  
Click Print.  
2
3
• Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print  
because the printer is out of memory.  
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click  
OK.  
For example, c:\Temp\file name.  
Printing to a file (PRN)  
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically  
saved in My Documents, Documents and Settings, or  
Users. The saved folder may differ, depending on your  
operating system or the application you are using.  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.  
Understanding special printer features  
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.  
   
4. Special features  
94  
Printing features  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window  
to change the print settings. The machine name, that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.  
Item  
Description  
Multiple Pages per Side Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will  
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose  
of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document.  
Poster Printing  
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the  
upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.  
4. Special features  
95  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half  
after printing to produce a booklet.  
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.  
Booklet Printing  
9
8
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under  
the Paper tab to see what paper sizes are available.  
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available  
paper (paper without or mark).  
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.  
• You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper  
Double-sided Printing  
• If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The  
machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.  
Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the duplex option.  
4. Special features  
96  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the  
control panel of the machine. This option is available only when you use the PCL/XPS printer driver.  
None: Disables this feature.  
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.  
Double-sided Printing  
(continue)  
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.  
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing.  
Paper Options  
Watermark  
Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which  
to enlarge or decrease the document.  
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to  
have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a  
document.  
4. Special features  
97  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
Watermark  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
(Creating a watermark)  
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.  
Watermark  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and  
options.  
(Editing a watermark)  
d Click Update to save the changes.  
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Watermark  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.  
d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
(Deleting a watermark)  
     
4. Special features  
98  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver.  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be  
printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted  
letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine:  
just print the letterhead overlay on your document.  
Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.  
• The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create  
an overlay with a watermark.  
• The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with  
the overlay.  
Overlay  
a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.  
c In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.  
(Creating a new page  
overlay)  
d In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if  
necessary (The default is C:\Formover).  
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.  
 
4. Special features  
99  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Overlay  
a Click the Advanced tab.  
b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.  
(Using a page overlay)  
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load.  
Select the overlay file you want to use.  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access  
the Open window.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the  
overlay from the Overlay List box.  
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears  
each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.  
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.  
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Overlay  
a In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.  
b Select Edit in the Text drop down list.  
c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.  
d Click Delete.  
(Deleting a page  
overlay)  
e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
   
4. Special features  
100  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
• This feature is available only if you have installed the optional memory or hard disk, or set the RAM disk.  
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable  
to your machine.  
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the  
memory.  
- Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.  
- Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print  
the rest of the copies later.  
Print Mode  
- Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.  
- Store: Select this setting to save a document in the hard disk without printing.  
- Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.  
- Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer  
spools the document into the hard disk and then prints it from the hard disk queue, decreasing the computer’s  
work load.  
- Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.  
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.  
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.  
4. Special features  
101  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects the printing information even  
though the data is snatched on a network.  
Job Encryption  
Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the hard drive is installed. The hard drive is used to decrypt  
the printing data.  
13  
Using Direct Printing Utility (Windows only)  
What is Direct Printing Utility?  
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your machine to print without having to opening the file.  
To install this program, select Advanced Installation > Custom Installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the  
printer driver.  
• HDD should be installed on your machine, to print files using this program.  
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing.  
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.  
 
4. Special features  
102  
Printing features  
• Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct  
Using the right-click menu  
Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file was  
created.  
Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing.  
1
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version  
1.7 and below. For higher versions, you must open the file  
to print it.  
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is  
added.  
Select the machine to use.  
2
3
4
Printing  
Customize the machine settings.  
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.  
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs >  
Samsung Printers > Direct Printing Utility > Direct Printing  
Utility.  
1
14  
Macintosh printing  
The Direct Printing Utility window appears.  
Printing a document  
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list  
and click Browse.  
2
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer  
driver settings in each application you use. Follow the steps below to  
print from a Macintosh:  
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.  
3
The file is added in the Select Files section.  
Open the document to print.  
1
2
Customize the machine settings for your needs.  
4
5
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup  
in some applications).  
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.  
 
4. Special features  
103  
Printing features  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options,  
and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.  
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.  
3
1
2
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In  
the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of  
pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.  
Open the File menu and click Print.  
4
5
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to  
print.  
Select the other options to use.  
3
4
Click Print.  
Click Print.  
6
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on  
one sheet of paper.  
Changing printer settings  
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.  
Printing on both sides of the paper  
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The  
machine name, which appears in the printer properties window,  
may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name,  
the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the  
following.  
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will  
be binding your finished document. The binding options are, as  
follows:  
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used  
in book binding.  
Printing multiple pages on one sheet  
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with  
calendars.  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This  
feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.  
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
1
menu.  
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.  
2
     
4. Special features  
104  
Printing features  
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.  
Using help  
3
4
5
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and  
click on the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window  
appears with information about that option's feature, which is  
provided from the driver.  
Select the other options to use.  
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.  
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second  
copy might print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing  
on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1  
copy.  
15  
Linux printing  
Printing from applications  
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using  
Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your  
machine from any such application.  
   
4. Special features  
105  
Printing features  
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the  
status of your print job.  
1
2
3
7
Select Print directly using lpr.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel.  
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your  
machine from the printer list and click Properties.  
Printing files  
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the  
standard CUPS, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS  
lpr utility allows you to do that, but the driver’s package replaces the  
standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
Change the print job properties using the following four tabs  
displayed at the top of the window.  
4
General: Changes the paper size, the paper type, and the  
orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex  
feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the  
number of pages per sheet.  
To print any document file:  
Enter lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and  
press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
1
Text: Specifies the page margins and set the text options,  
such as spacing or columns.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to  
print window appears first. Just select any files you want to  
print and click Open.  
Graphics: Sets image options that are used when printing  
image files, such as color options, image size, or image  
position.  
In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and  
change the print job properties.  
2
Advanced: Sets the print resolution, paper source, and  
destination.  
Click OK to start printing.  
3
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties  
window.  
5
6
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
 
4. Special features  
106  
Printing features  
Jobs: Shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel  
the selected job and select the Show completed jobs  
check box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Configuring Printer Properties  
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your  
machine as a printer.  
Classes: Shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add  
to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click  
Remove from Class to remove the machine from the  
selected class.  
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
1
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer  
Properties window.  
4
Select your machine on the available printers list and click  
Properties.  
2
16  
The Printer Properties window appears.  
Unix printing  
3
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: Allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer  
list in Printers configuration.  
Proceeding the print job  
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, PS or HPGL  
files to print.  
Connection: Allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice  
versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port  
in this tab.  
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.  
1
For example, if you are printing “document1”  
printui document1  
Driver: Allows you to view or select another machine  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device  
options.  
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in  
which the user can select various print options.  
Select a printer that has been already added.  
2
   
4. Special features  
107  
Printing features  
Select the printing options from the window such as Page  
Selection.  
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By  
default, it is Auto Selection.  
3
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed  
on a page.  
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.  
4
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
printer driver, press Properties (see "Changing printer  
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.  
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line  
hairline, Double-line hairline)  
Press OK to start the print job.  
Image tab  
5
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image  
position of your document.  
Changing the machine settings  
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can  
select various print options in printer Properties.  
Text tab  
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual  
print output.  
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A”  
for Apply, and “C” for Cancel.  
HPGL/2 tab  
General tab  
Use only black pen: To print all graphics in black.  
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,  
according to your requirements.  
Fit plot to page: Fit the entire graphic into a single page.  
Pen Width: Change value to increase the thickness of pen lines.  
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in  
By default, it is 1000.  
the list box are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.  
4. Special features  
108  
Printing features  
Margins tab  
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default,  
margins are not enabled. The user can change the margin  
settings by changing the values in the respective fields. Set by  
default, these values depend on the page size selected.  
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.  
Printer-Specific Settings tab  
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize  
various settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend  
on the PPD file.  
4. Special features  
109  
Fax features  
17  
19  
Automatic redialing  
Confirming a transmission  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer  
when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number.  
The redial time depends on the country's factory default setting. To  
change the time interval between redials and the number of redial  
attempts.  
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the  
machine beeps and returns to ready mode.  
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error  
message appears on the display. For a list of error messages and their  
message, press Stop/Clear to clear the message and try to send the  
fax again.  
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press OK to redial the  
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear).  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report  
automatically each time sending a fax is completed. For further  
18  
Redialing the last number  
20  
Sending a fax in the computer  
Press Redial/Pause on the control panel.  
1
2
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the  
machine automatically begins to send.  
Open the document to be sent.  
1
2
Select Print from the File menu.  
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add  
another page. Load another original and press OK. When you  
have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.  
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly  
different depending on your application.  
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window  
3
           
4. Special features  
110  
Fax features  
Click Print or OK.  
Press Menu > Fax Feature > OK > Delay Send> OK on the  
control panel.  
4
5
4
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option.  
Or select Fax > Delayed Send > To on the touch screen.  
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.  
5
6
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the  
document.  
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and  
repeat steps 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
7
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter  
another group dial numbers anymore.  
Click Send.  
6
21  
Enter the job name and the time.  
8
9
Delaying a fax transmission  
If you set a time earier than the current time, the fax will be  
sent at that time on the following day.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
Press  
(Fax) on the control panel.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.  
2
3
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you  
that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.  
 
4. Special features  
111  
Fax features  
22  
24  
Adding documents to a reserved fax  
Sending a priority fax  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
2
3
1
2
Press Menu > Fax Feature > OK > Add Pages > OK on the  
control panel.  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Feature > OK > Priority Send >  
OK on the control panel.  
Or select Fax > Priority Send > To on the touch screen.  
Select the fax job and press OK.  
When you have finished, select No when Another Page?  
appears. The machine scans the original into memory.  
Enter the destination fax number and press OK.  
3
4
5
Enter the job name and press OK.  
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
4
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add  
another pages. Load another original and press OK.  
23  
Canceling a reserved fax job  
When you have finished, select No when Another Page?  
appears.  
Press Menu > Fax Feature > OK > Cancel Job > OK on the  
control panel.  
The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.  
1
2
Press OK when Yes highlights.  
The selected fax is deleted from memory.  
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
3
     
4. Special features  
112  
Fax features  
25  
26  
Forwarding a received fax  
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other  
destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but  
have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful.  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other  
destination by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but  
have to receive the fax, this feature may be useful.  
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is  
forwarded in grayscale.  
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is  
forwarded in grayscale.  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Feature > OK > Forward > OK  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Feature > OK > Forward > OK  
1
1
> Fax, Email ,or Server > OK > Receive Forward > OK >  
Forward > OK on the control panel.  
> Fax > OK > Send Forward > OK > On > OK on the control  
panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup > Forward >  
Fax, Email ,or Server > Receive Forward > On on the touch  
screen.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup > Forward >  
Fax, Email ,or Server > Send Forward > On on the touch  
screen.  
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has  
been completed, select Forward & Print.  
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server  
address and press OK.  
2
3
4
2
3
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server  
address and press OK.  
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax  
machine.  
Enter the time to stop forwarding and press OK.  
   
4. Special features  
113  
Fax features  
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
Press OK.  
5
3
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax  
machine.  
28  
Receiving a fax in the computer  
27  
Sending faxes on both sides of paper  
To receive a fax in the computer, Set the option on the  
control panel. Press (Fax) > Menu > OK >Fax Feature >  
OK > Forward > PC > OK on the control panel.  
This is available only when you load originals into the  
document feeder.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup >  
Forward > PC > On on the touch screen.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
Open the Samsung Scan & Fax Manager.  
1
2
Press  
(Fax) > Duplex on the control panel.  
Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan &  
Fax Manager > Properties.  
2
Or select Fax > Manual Send, On Hook Dial, Delayed Send,  
Priority Send, Speed Dial Send, or Redial > Duplex on the  
touch screen.  
Use Set Fax Receiving to change the fax settings.  
3
Enable Fax Receiving: Select whether to use or not.  
Off: Send faxes in normal mode.  
File Format: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.  
2 Side: Send faxes on both sides of the original.  
Save Location: Select location to save the converted  
2->1Side ROT2: Send faxes on both sides of the original  
and prints each one on a separate sheet, but the  
information on the back side of the printout is rotated  
180°.  
faxes.  
Prefix: Select file or folder scheme as prefix.  
   
4. Special features  
114  
Fax features  
Notify me when fax received: Set to show the popup  
window to notify receiving a fax.  
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to  
the EXT socket on the back of your machine.  
Print received fax: After receiving the fax, set prints  
information for the received fax.  
DRPD: you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a  
telephone company service which enables an user to use a  
single telephone line to answer several different  
telephone numbers. For further details, see "Receiving  
Press OK.  
4
1
29  
Changing the receive modes  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Setup > OK > Receiving > OK  
This setting may not be available depending on your  
country.  
> Receive Mode > OK on the control panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting >  
Fax Default > Common > Receive Mode on the touch  
screen.  
Press OK.  
2
3
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes  
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
into the fax reception mode.  
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start.  
30  
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to  
your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,  
and the caller can leave a message on the answering  
machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line,  
the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to  
receive the fax.  
Receiving manually in Tel mode  
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then  
pressing Start when you hear a fax tone.  
   
4. Special features  
115  
Fax features  
31  
32  
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode  
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT  
socket on the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message,  
the answering machine stores the message. If your machine detects  
a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.  
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT  
socket, you can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the  
extension telephone, without going to the fax machine.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones,  
press the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the  
fax.  
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your  
answering machine is switched off, or no answering  
machine is connected to EXT socket, your machine  
automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined  
number of rings.  
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the  
last asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to  
whatever you want.  
• If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring  
counter, set the machine to answer incoming calls within  
1 ring.  
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the  
EXT socket, copy and scan features are not available.  
• If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the  
answering machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the  
outgoing message from the answering machine will  
interrupt your phone conversation.  
33  
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode  
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an  
user to use a single telephone line to answer several different  
telephone numbers. This feature is often used by answering services  
who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know  
which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the  
phone.  
       
4. Special features  
116  
Fax features  
34  
Select  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Setup > Receiving > DRPD  
1
Mode > Waiting Ring on the control panel.  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting >  
Fax Default > Common > Receive Mode > DRPD on the  
touch screen.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed  
by unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all  
incoming faxes go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes  
with entering the password.  
Call your fax number from another telephone.  
2
3
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The  
machine requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Feature > Secure Receive on the  
control panel.  
When the machine completes learning, the display shows  
Completed DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD  
Ring appears.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup >  
Secure Receive on the touch screen.  
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.  
4
Printing received faxes  
• DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax  
number, or connect the machine to another telephone  
line.  
Select  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Feature > Secure Receive >  
1
Print on the control panel.  
• After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to  
verify that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have  
a call placed to a different number assigned to that same  
line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extension  
telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT  
socket.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup >  
Secure Receive > Print on the touch screen.  
Enter a four-digit password and press OK.  
2
3
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.  
 
4. Special features  
117  
Fax features  
35  
36  
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper  
Receiving faxes in memory  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Setup > OK > Receiving > OK  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes  
1
> Duplex Print > OK on the control panel.  
while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you  
are copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its  
memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the  
machine automatically prints the fax.  
Off: Prints in Normal mode.  
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.  
37  
Printing sent fax report automatically  
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note  
pad.  
Press  
(Fax) > Menu > Fax Setup > OK > Auto Report >  
1
2
2
OK > On > OK on the control panel.  
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
3
5
Press OK.  
2
3
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.  
       
4. Special features  
118  
Scan features  
38  
Select the application program you want and press OK.  
4
5
Scanning from network connected machine  
Default setting is My Documents.  
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the  
software CD, since the printer driver includes the scan program (see  
Basic Guide).  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan  
destination to My Documents.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
1
• If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.  
Select  
panel.  
(Scan) > Scan to PC > Network PC on the control  
Scanning begins.  
2
3
6
39  
Or select Scan > Network PC on the touch screen.  
Scanning to email  
If you see Not Available message, check the port  
connection.  
Setting up an email account  
1
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if  
necessary.  
Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail  
Server(SMTP).  
2
ID is the same ID as the registered Computer ID for  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host  
name.  
Password is the 4 digit number registered Password for  
3
Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
       
4. Special features  
119  
Scan features  
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
Enter the sender’s and recipient’s email address.  
4
5
4
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to  
require authentication.  
• You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto  
Send To Self option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-  
mail on SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
6
7
Enter an email subject and press OK.  
Press Apply.  
5
6
7
8
Select the file format to scan, and press OK.  
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.  
• If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3  
before SMTP, put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP  
Before SMTP Authentication.  
• Enter the IP address and port number.  
40  
Scanning and sending an email  
Scanning to FTP/SMB server  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
1
Setting up an FTP/SMB server  
Select  
(Scan) > Scan to Email on the control panel.  
2
3
1
Or select Scan > Send Email on the touch screen.  
Select Address Book > Individual > Add.  
Enter the login name and password if you configured on  
SyncThru™ Web Service.  
2
3
Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB.  
 
4. Special features  
120  
Scan features  
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host  
name.  
Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server  
4
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
1
2
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
5
6
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits  
the access of unauthorized people.  
Select  
panel.  
(Scan) > Scan to SMB or Scan to FTP on the control  
3
Enter the login name and password.  
7
8
Or select Scan > SMB or FTP on the touch screen.  
Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain  
domain, otherwise just enter your computer name which is  
registered to the SMB server.  
Select a server and scan format you want.  
4
5
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned  
image to the specified server.  
Enter the path for saving the scanned image.  
9
41  
• The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.  
• The folder properties need to be setup as a share.  
Scanning from image editing program  
• Your user name should have the rights to read and write  
the folder.  
You also can scan and import documents at the image editing  
software such as Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-  
compliant. Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant  
software:  
Press Apply.  
10  
 
4. Special features  
121  
Scan features  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
1
2
3
4
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
2
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.  
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Devices and Printers.  
3
4
5
6
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.  
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start  
Scan.  
Set the scan options.  
New Scan application appears.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
5
6
42  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see  
your preferences affect the picture.  
Scanning using the WIA driver  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
7
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)  
driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components  
provided by Microsoft Windows 7 and works with digital cameras  
and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to  
scan and easily adjust images without using additional software:  
43  
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
2
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
   
4. Special features  
122  
Scan features  
Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers, and start  
Samsung Scan Assitant.  
The SmarThru appears.  
3
4
Scan to: You can scan an image and save it to an  
application or folder, email it, or publish it on a web site.  
Click the Help ( ) button from the upper-right corner of the  
window and click on any option you want to know about.  
Image: You can edit an image and send it to a selected  
application or folder, email it, or publish it on a web site.  
Print: You can print images you have saved.  
Set the scan options.  
4
5
Click the Help ( ) button from the upper-right corner of the  
window and click on any option you want to know about.  
Click Scan.  
44  
Click Scan to.  
Scanning with SmarThru 4  
5
6
Select destination among Application, E-mail, Folder, OCR,  
or Web.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
If needed, click Settings to customize the settings.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
7
8
2
Click Scan.  
Double-click the SmarThru 4 icon.  
3
 
4. Special features  
123  
Scan features  
45  
Click the SmarThru Office icon ( ) in the tray area of the  
Windows taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
5
Scanning with SmarThru Office  
Click the scanning icon ( ) to open the scanning window.  
The Scan Setting window opens.  
6
7
8
• To use SmarThru Office, you have to install the program  
manually from the supplied CD. Select Advanced  
Installation > Custom Installation and choose SmarThru  
Office to install.  
Set scan settings and click Scan.  
• You can use the OCR (Optical Character Reader) feature  
from SmarThru Office program.  
46  
Macintosh scanning  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
2
Scanning from USB connected machine  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
1
and powered on.  
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
3
4
2
The SmarThru Office appears.  
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
3
Click the Help ( ) button from the upper-right corner of the  
window and click on any option you want to know about.  
If No Image Capture device connected message appears,  
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem  
continues, refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
   
4. Special features  
124  
Scan features  
Select the option you want.  
-
-
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make  
sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked.  
4
5
Scan and save your scanned image.  
Click Connect.  
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to  
select port, or If TWAIN UI appears, click Change Port..  
from the Preference tab and select a new port.  
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac  
OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.  
For 10.6, select your device below SHARED.  
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
5
6
Scanning from network connected machine  
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Mac  
OS X 10.6.  
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update  
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates  
properly Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.  
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
• For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
1
2
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such  
as Adobe Photoshop.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
3
4
According to OS, follow steps below.  
For 10.4~10.5  
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.  
-
4. Special features  
125  
Scan features  
47  
Select the scanner on the list.  
4
Linux scanning  
Scanning  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your  
desktop.  
2
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
3
Click Properties.  
5
6
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or  
load the documents face up into the ADF.  
From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.  
7
 
4. Special features  
126  
Scan features  
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in  
the Preview Pane.  
Editing an image with Image Manager  
8
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands  
and tools to edit your scanned image.  
Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the  
Preview Pane.  
9
Select the option you want.  
10  
11  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to  
the Job Type drop-down list.  
4. Special features  
127  
Using shared folder features  
49  
This feature allows you to use the machine’s memory as a shared  
folder. The advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use  
the shared folder through your computer’s window.  
Using the shared folder  
You can use the shared folder in the same way exactly like the normal  
computer. Create, edit and delete the folder or file as a normal  
Windows folder. You also store the scanned data in the shared folder.  
You can directly print files stored on a the shared folder. You can  
print TIFF, BMP, JPEG and PRN files.  
• You can use this feature in the models that have a mass  
storage device.  
• The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict  
the user’ s access and also set the maximum number of  
simultaneous users.  
48  
Creating a shared folder  
Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.  
1
2
Enter the printer’s \\[ip address] (example:  
\\169.254.133.42)in the address field, and press the Enter  
key or click Go.  
Create a new folder under nfsroot directory.  
3
   
4. Special features  
128  
Using memory/hard drive features  
From the control panel  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on  
options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you  
can use these features from the (Menu) button> System Setup  
> Job Management.  
50  
Setting up the optional memory  
Active Job: All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in  
the active job queue in the order you sent them to the printer.  
You can delete a job from the queue before printing, or promote  
a job to print sooner.  
From the printer driver  
After installing the optional memory, you can use advanced printing  
features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a private  
job in the Print window. Select Properties or Preference, and  
configure the printing mode.  
File Policy: You can choose the file policy for generating file  
name before you proceed with the job through optional  
memory. If the optional memory already has the same name  
when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite  
it.  
Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job.  
After installing the hard drive, you can also print the  
predefined document templates from the  
(Menu) button  
> System Setup > Form Menu.  
     
5. Maintenance  
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use  
of your machine. It also provides information for maintaining the toner  
cartridge.  
 
5. Maintenance  
130  
Storing the toner cartridge  
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,  
temperature and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these  
recommendations to ensure optmal performance, highest quality,  
and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.  
-
-
-
-
Dusty places.  
A car for a long period of time.  
An environment where corrosive gases are present.  
An environment with salty air.  
Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will  
be used. This should be in controlled temperature and humidity  
conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original and  
unopened package until installation – if original packaging is not  
available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and  
store in a dark cabinet.  
1
Handling instructions  
Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the  
cartridge.  
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its  
useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner  
cartridge is removed from the printer, follow the instructions below  
to store the toner cartridge properly.  
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.  
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse  
direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage.  
Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original  
package.  
2
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing  
up as if it were installed in the machine.  
Toner cartridge usage  
Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:  
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of  
non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including  
generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.  
-
-
-
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).  
Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%.  
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or  
temperature.  
-
Direct sunlight or room light.  
       
5. Maintenance  
131  
Storing the toner cartridge  
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the  
machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or  
non-Samsung brand toner cartridges.  
3
Estimated cartridge life  
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends  
on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield  
may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on,  
operating environment, printing interval, media type and/or media  
size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of  
the toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more  
often.  
 
5. Maintenance  
132  
Tips for moving & storing your machine  
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.  
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by  
toner, which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print  
quality.  
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are  
holding the machine securely.  
   
5. Maintenance  
133  
Useful management tools  
4
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service  
Samsung AnyWeb Print  
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from  
Windows.  
1
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print  
Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an  
ordinary program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers  
> Samsung AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link to  
the website where the tool is available for download.  
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or  
click Go.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
5
2
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service  
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to  
log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service  
without logging in but you won’t have access to Settings tab and  
Security tab.  
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum  
requirement for SyncThru™ Web Service.  
• SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide  
may differ from your machine depending on its options or  
models.  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service  
1
website.  
• Network model only.  
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
2
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
         
5. Maintenance  
134  
Useful management tools  
Settings tab  
SyncThru™ Web Service overview  
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine  
and network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.  
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.  
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.  
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network  
environment. Sets options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.  
Security tab  
Information tab  
This tab allows you to set system and network security information.  
You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.  
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can  
check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print  
reports, such as an error report.  
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information  
and also enables or disables machine features.  
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the  
machine and their severity.  
Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6  
filtering, 802.1x, and Authentication servers.  
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of  
toner left in the cartridge.  
User Access Control: Classifies users into several groups  
according to each user’s role. Each user’s authorization,  
authentication and accounting will be controlled by the group’s  
role definition.  
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex  
and duplex.  
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s  
information.  
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports,  
e-mail address, and font reports.  
5. Maintenance  
135  
Useful management tools  
From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail  
Notification.  
Maintenance tab  
3
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware  
and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also  
connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the  
Link menu.  
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go  
to Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail  
Server(SMTP) to configure network environment before  
setting e-mail notification.  
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.  
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.  
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or  
Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification.  
check information.  
4
5
Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.  
E-mail notification setup  
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with  
notification items you want to receive an alert for.  
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this  
option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail  
address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner  
cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's  
e-mail automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a  
machine administrator.  
Click Apply.  
6
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent  
successfully. In that case, contact the a network  
administrator.  
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
1
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the  
address field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
Setting the system administrator’s information  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
2
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.  
5. Maintenance  
136  
Useful management tools  
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
1
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the  
address field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
This interface is intended to be used by general device users in a  
small business or home environment.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
To open the program:  
2
3
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers >  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager.  
From the Security tab, select System Security > System  
Administrator  
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various  
basic sections as described in the table that follows:  
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location,  
and email address.  
4
3
Click Apply.  
5
1
2
6
4
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
(Windows only)  
5
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is a Windows-based application that  
combines Samsung machine settings into one location. Samsung  
Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing  
environments, settings/actions and launching. All of these features  
provide a gateway to conveniently use your Samsung machine.  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user  
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and  
the advanced user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is  
easy: just click a button.  
6
Printer list  
The Printer List displays the installed printer icons  
on your computer.  
1
 
5. Maintenance  
137  
Useful management tools  
Printer  
This area gives you general information about  
Quick links  
Displays Quick links to machine specific  
functions. This section also includes links to  
applications in the advanced settings.  
information your machine. You can check information, such as  
the machine’s model name, IP address (or Port  
name), and machine status.  
4
5
If you connect your machine to a  
network, the SyncThru™ Web Service  
window appears.  
2
Troubleshooting button: This button  
opens Troubleshooting Guide when  
an error occurs. You can directly open  
the necessary section in the user’s  
guide.  
Contents  
area  
Displays information about the selected machine,  
remaining toner level, and paper. The information  
will vary based on the machine selected. Some  
machines do not have this feature.  
Application Includes links for changing to the advanced  
information settings, preference, help, and about.  
Order  
6 supplies  
Click on the Order button from the supply  
ordering window. You can order replacement  
toner cartridge(s) from online.  
3
The  
button is used to change the  
user interface to the advanced settings  
Click the Help ( ) button from the upper-right corner of the  
window and click on any option you want to know about.  
Advanced settings user interface overview  
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person  
responsible for managing the network and machines.  
   
5. Maintenance  
138  
Useful management tools  
Device Settings  
Alert Settings  
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.  
Click Device Settings > Link to Program button, you can configure  
various machine settings.  
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be  
received.  
Scan to PC Settings  
Email Alert: Povides options relating to receiving alerts via email.  
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.  
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related  
alerts.  
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled  
on the device.  
Job Accounting  
Profile: Displays the scanning profiles saved on the selected  
device.  
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job  
accounting user. This quota information can be created and applied  
to devices by job accounting software such as SyncThru™ or  
CounThru™ admin software.  
Basic tab: Contains settings related general scan and device  
settings.  
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.  
7
Fax to PC Settings  
Using Samsung Printer Status (Windows only)  
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of  
the selected device.  
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs  
you of the machine status.  
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on  
this device.  
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the  
device and allow more options to be set.  
   
5. Maintenance  
139  
Useful management tools  
Icon  
Mean  
Description  
• The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents  
shown in this user’s guide may differ depending on the  
machine or operating system in use.  
Normal  
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing  
no errors or warnings.  
• Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with  
your machine (see Basic Guide).  
Warning  
Error  
The machine is in a state where an error might  
occur in the future. For example, it might be in  
toner low status, which may lead to toner empty  
status.  
Samsung Printer Status overview  
The machine has at least one error.  
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the  
Samsung Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed  
automatically when you install the machine software.  
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the  
1
Printing Preferences , click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.  
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:  
2
5
3
4
Toner Level  
You can view the level of toner remaining in  
each toner cartridge. The machine and the  
number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the  
above window may differ depending on the  
machine in use. Some machines do not have  
this feature.  
1
5. Maintenance  
140  
Useful management tools  
Smart Panel overview  
Alert Settings  
Select the settings you want from the options  
window.  
2
3
4
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the  
Smart Panel. You can also launch Smart Panel manually.  
Order Supplies  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)  
from online.  
Troubleshooting You can directly open the troubleshooting  
For Mac OS 10.5, click Print & Fax from System  
Preferences > Open Printer Queue... of a  
printer > Utility.  
section in the user’s guide.  
5 Close  
Close the window.  
Macintosh  
Linux  
For Mac OS 10.6, click Print & Fax from System  
Preferences > Open Printer Queue... of a  
printer > Printer Setup > Utility > Open Printer  
Utility.  
8
Using Smart Panel (Macintosh and Linux only)  
Double-click the Smart Panel icon in the  
Notification Area.  
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the  
machine’s status, and allows you to customize the machine’s  
settings. For Macintosh, Smart Panel is installed automatically when  
you install the machine software. For Linux, you can download Smart  
2
3
4
1
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this  
user’s guide may differ depending on the machine or  
operating system in use.  
• Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with  
your machine (see Basic Guide).  
   
5. Maintenance  
141  
Useful management tools  
Changing Smart Panel’s settings  
Toner Level  
You can view the level of toner remaining in  
each toner cartridge. The machine and the  
number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the  
above window may differ depending on the  
machine in use. Some machines do not have  
this feature.  
Right-click in Linux on the Smart Panel icon and select Options.  
Select the settings you want from the Options window.  
1
2
9
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
Buy Now  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)  
from online.  
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for  
configuring machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux  
User’s Guide  
You can view the online User’s Guide.  
Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator (see "Installation for Linux"  
This button opens the  
Troubleshooting Guide when an  
error occurs. You can directly open  
the troubleshooting section in the  
user’s guide.  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
3
Opening Unified Driver Configurator  
Printer Setting You can configure various machine settings in  
the Printer Settings Utility window. Some  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the  
desktop.  
1
machines do not have this feature.  
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung  
Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.  
4
If you connect your machine to a  
network, the SyncThru™ Web  
Service window appears instead of  
the Printer Settings Utility.  
Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding  
configuration window.  
2
 
5. Maintenance  
142  
Useful management tools  
Printers tab  
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the  
machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver  
Configurator window.  
1 Printer Configuration  
2 Port Configuration  
To use the on screen help, click Help.  
1
2
Switches to Printers configuration.  
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the  
Unified Driver Configurator.  
3
Shows all of the installed machines.  
Shows the status, model name, and URI of your  
machine.  
3
Printers configuration  
The printer control buttons are, as follows:  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.  
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.  
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.  
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.  
5. Maintenance  
143  
Useful management tools  
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default  
machine.  
1
2
Shows all of the machine classes.  
Shows the status of the class and the number of  
machines in the class.  
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.  
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is  
working properly.  
Refresh: Renews the classes list.  
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer’s  
properties.  
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.  
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.  
Classes tab  
Ports configuration  
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the  
status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state  
when its owner has terminated the job for any reason.  
5. Maintenance  
144  
Useful management tools  
1
2
Switches to Ports configuration.  
Shows all of the available ports.  
Shows the port type, device connected to the  
port, and status.  
3
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.  
Release port: Releases the selected port.  
6. Troubleshooting  
146  
Paper feeding problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Paper jams during printing.  
Paper sticks together.  
Clear the paper jam.  
• Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray .  
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.  
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.  
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.  
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.  
Paper does not feed into the  
machine.  
• Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.  
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.  
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.  
The paper keeps jamming.  
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special  
materials, use the multi-purpose tray (or manual feeder).  
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the  
machine.  
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.  
Transparencies stick together in the Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits  
paper exit.  
from the machine.  
Envelopes skew or fail to feed  
correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.  
   
6. Troubleshooting  
147  
Power and cable connecting problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not receiving power,  
• Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a  
control, press it.  
(Power) button on the  
or the connection cable between the  
computer and the machine is not  
connected properly.  
• Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.  
   
6. Troubleshooting  
148  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not The machine is not receiving power.  
print.  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a  
(Power) button on the control, press it.  
The machine is not selected as the default Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.  
machine.  
Check the machine for the following:  
• The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover.  
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam.  
• No paper is loaded. Load paper.  
• The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge.  
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.  
The connection cable between the  
computer and the machine is not  
connected properly.  
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it.  
The connection cable between the  
computer and the machine is defective.  
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly  
and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable.  
The port setting is incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent  
to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that  
the machine is attached to the correct one.  
The machine may be configured  
incorrectly.  
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are  
correct.  
   
6. Troubleshooting  
149  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not The printer driver may be incorrectly  
Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.  
print.  
installed.  
The machine is malfunctioning.  
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is  
indicating a system error. Contact a service representative.  
The document size is so big that the hard Get more hard disk space and print the document again.  
disk space of the computer is insufficient  
to access the print job.  
The output tray is full.  
Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes  
printing.  
The machine selects  
print materials from  
the wrong paper  
source.  
The paper option that was selected in the For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under  
Printing Preferences may be incorrect.  
the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences. Select the correct paper  
source. See the printer driver help screen.  
A print job is  
extremely slow.  
The job may be very complex.  
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality  
settings.  
Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be  
Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help  
screen.  
incorrect.  
The paper size and the paper size settings Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper  
do not match.  
in the tray.  
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the  
paper selection in the software application settings you use.  
6. Troubleshooting  
150  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine prints,  
but the text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
The machine cable is loose or defective.  
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have  
already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine  
to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a  
new machine cable.  
incomplete.  
The wrong printer driver was selected.  
Check the applicatinon’s printer selection menu to ensure that your  
machine is selected.  
The software application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from another application.  
The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on  
again.  
If you are in a DOS environment, the font See "Changing the font setting" on page 84.  
setting for your machine may be set  
incorrectly.  
Pages print, but they The toner cartridge is defective or out of Redistribute the toner, if necessary.  
are blank.  
toner.  
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.  
The file may have blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.  
Some parts, such as the controller or the Contact a service representative.  
board, may be defective.  
6. Troubleshooting  
151  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not Incompatibility between the PDF file and Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print  
print PDF files  
the Acrobat products.  
As Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
correctly. Some parts  
of graphics, text, or  
illustrations are  
missing.  
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.  
The print quality of  
photos is not good.  
Images are not clear.  
The resolution of the photo is very low.  
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software  
application, the resolution will be reduced.  
Before printing, the  
Using damp paper can cause vapor during This is not a problem. Just keep printing.  
machine emits vapor printing.  
near the output tray.  
The machine does not Paper size and paper size setting do not  
Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing  
print special-sized  
paper, such as billing  
paper.  
match.  
Preferences.  
The printed billing  
paper is curled.  
The paper type setting does not match.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences , click  
Paper tab, and set type to Thick.  
6. Troubleshooting  
152  
Printing quality problems  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to  
clear the problem.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Light or faded print  
• If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.  
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print  
resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.  
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the  
inside of your machine.  
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. If these steps do  
not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
The top half of the paper is The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.  
printed lighter than the  
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type  
rest of the paper  
to Recycled.  
   
6. Troubleshooting  
153  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Toner specks  
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.  
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine.  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative.  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:  
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of  
paper.  
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or  
brand of paper.  
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick.  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
White Spots  
If white spots appear on the page:  
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the  
transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine.  
• The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine.  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
6. Troubleshooting  
154  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the  
toner cartridge and install a new one.  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. If these steps do  
not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
Black or color background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:  
• Change to a lighter weight paper.  
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can  
increase the amount of background shading.  
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one.  
Toner smear  
• Clean the inside of the machine.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one.  
6. Troubleshooting  
155  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:  
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install  
a new one.  
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will  
likely correct itself after a few more pages.  
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.  
Background scatter  
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.  
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until  
necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture.  
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.  
A
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your  
software application or in Printing Preferences. Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If  
Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality  
problem.  
Toner particles are around The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.  
bold characters or pictures  
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type  
to Recycled.  
• Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used,  
an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.  
6. Troubleshooting  
156  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Misformed characters  
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try  
different paper.  
Page skew  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
• Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
Curl or wave  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
6. Troubleshooting  
157  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Wrinkles or creases  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Back of printouts are dirty • Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine.  
Solid color or black pages • The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one.  
• The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.  
6. Troubleshooting  
158  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Loose toner  
• Clean the inside of the machine.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
• Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one.  
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.  
Character voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:  
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies,  
some character voids are normal.  
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications.  
A
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:  
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one.  
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.  
6. Troubleshooting  
159  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
• Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type  
to Thin.  
• An unknown image  
repetitively appears on a  
few sheets  
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.  
The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for  
• Loose toner  
• Light print or  
contamination occurs  
6. Troubleshooting  
160  
Copying problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light or too Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies.  
dark.  
Smears, lines, marks, or  
spots appear on copies.  
• If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.  
• If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit.  
Copy image is skewed.  
• Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide .  
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine.  
Blank copies print out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
Image rubs off the copy  
easily.  
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.  
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.  
Frequent copy paper jams • Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the  
paper guides, if necessary.  
occur.  
• Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight.  
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.  
Toner cartridge produces • Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms,  
newsletters, books, or other documents that use more toner.  
• The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.  
• Turn the machine off and back on.  
fewer copies than  
expected before running  
out of toner.  
   
6. Troubleshooting  
161  
Scanning problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The scanner does not  
work.  
• Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document  
feeder.  
• There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function  
to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate.  
• Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.  
• Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If  
necessary, replace the printer cable.  
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the SmarThru Office or the application you  
want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).  
The unit scans very slowly. • Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.  
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
• Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and  
reproduce the scanned image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to  
increase the speed. For details about how to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.  
   
6. Troubleshooting  
162  
Scanning problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Message appears on your • There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.  
computer screen:  
• The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.  
• The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.  
• The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.  
• Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.  
• The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.  
• Device can’t be set to the  
H/W mode you want.  
• Port is being used by  
another program.  
• Port is disabled.  
• Scanner is busy receiving  
or printing data. When the  
current job is completed,  
try again.  
• Invalid handle.  
• Scanning has failed.  
6. Troubleshooting  
163  
Faxing problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display, or the buttons are  
not working.  
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.  
• Ensure that the power switch is turned on, and the soft power switch on the control panel is pressed.  
No dial tone.  
• Check that the phone line is properly connected.  
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.  
The numbers stored in  
memory do not dial  
correctly.  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an addess book list.  
The original does not feed • Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right  
size, not too thick or thin.  
into the machine.  
• Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.  
• The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative.  
Faxes are not received  
automatically.  
• The receiving mode should be set to fax.  
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
• Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.  
The machine does not  
send.  
• Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.  
• Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.  
   
6. Troubleshooting  
164  
Faxing problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
The incoming fax has  
blank spaces or is of poor-  
quality.  
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
• Check your machine by making a copy.  
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge.  
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.  
Some of the words on an  
incoming fax are  
stretched.  
There are lines on the  
originals you sent.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.  
The machine dials a  
number, but the  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other  
machine operator and ask them to solve the problem on their side.  
connection with the other  
fax machine fails.  
Faxes do not store in  
memory.  
There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete  
any faxes you no longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.  
Blank areas appear at the You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.  
bottom of each page or on  
other pages, with a small  
strip of text at the top.  
6. Troubleshooting  
165  
Operating system problems  
1
Common Windows problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
“File in Use” message  
appears during  
installation.  
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the  
printer driver.  
“General Protection  
Fault”, “Exception OE”,  
“Spool 32”, or “Illegal  
Operation” messages  
appear.  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.  
“Fail To Print”, “A printer These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message  
timeout error occurred”  
message appear.  
appears in ready mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has  
occurred.  
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.  
     
6. Troubleshooting  
166  
Operating system problems  
2
Common Macintosh problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not print PDF  
files correctly. Some parts of  
graphics, text, or illustrations are  
missing.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat  
printing options.  
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.  
The document has printed, but the Update your MAC OS to MAC OS X 10.3.3 or higher.  
print job has not disappeared from  
the spooler in Mac OS X10.3.2.  
Some letters are not displayed  
normally during cover page  
printing.  
Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are  
displayed normally on the cover page.  
When printing a document in  
Macintosh with Acrobat  
Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print  
incorrectly.  
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.  
Refer to the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages.  
 
6. Troubleshooting  
167  
Operating system problems  
3
Common Linux problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not  
print.  
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the  
Printers tab in the Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that  
your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device.  
• Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list.  
Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped, press the Start button.  
Normal operation of the machine should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some  
problems in printing occur.  
• Check if your application has special print options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line  
parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the  
command line parameter in the command item.  
Some color images come This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the  
out all black.  
document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color  
space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript  
version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com.  
Some color images come This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the  
out in unexpected color.  
document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE  
color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com.  
 
6. Troubleshooting  
168  
Operating system problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not  
print whole pages, and  
output is printed on half  
the page.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit  
Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252.The problem is solved in  
AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/  
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.  
I cannot scan via Gimp  
Front-end.  
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in  
for Gimp on the your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp  
home page. For the detailed information, refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end  
application.  
If you wish to use another kind of scan application, refer to application’s Help.  
“Cannot open port device Avoid changing print job parameters (e.q., via LPR GUI) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS  
file” error message  
appears when printing a  
document.  
server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning.  
Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked  
and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port  
in the Port configuration window.  
6. Troubleshooting  
169  
Operating system problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
• Ensure your machine is attached to your computer, connected properly via the USB port, and is turned on.  
The machine does not  
appear on the scanners  
list.  
• Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified Linux Driver configurator,  
switch to Scanners configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your  
machine's name is listed in the window.  
• Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O  
interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible.  
To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user  
will encounter “device busy” response. This usually happens when starting a scan procedure. An appropriate  
message box appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your  
scanner, port's symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/  
mfp1 relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4  
respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you can see if the port is occupied by another  
application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present port applicaton is not functioning properly.  
The machine does not  
scan.  
• Ensure a document is loaded into the machine, ensure your machine is connected to the computer.  
• If there is an I/O error while scanning.  
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.  
6. Troubleshooting  
170  
Operating system problems  
4
Common PostScript problems  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Solution  
The PostScript file cannot The PostScript driver may not be installed • Install the PostScript driver (see "Software installation" on page 4).  
be printed  
correctly.  
• Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available  
for printing.  
• If the problem persists, contact a service representative.  
Limit Check Error report  
prints  
The print job was too complex.  
You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more  
memory.  
A PostScript error page  
prints  
The print job may not be PostScript.  
Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether  
the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to  
be sent to the machine.  
The optional tray is not  
selected in the driver  
The printer driver has not been  
configured to recognize the optional tray. and set the tray option.  
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab,  
When printing a document The resolution setting in the printer driver Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches  
in Macintosh with Acrobat may not be matched with the one in the one in Acrobat Reader.  
Reader 6.0 or higher,  
colors print incorrectly  
Acrobat Reader.  
 
171  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung  
products, contact the Samsung customer care center.  
Country/Region  
CANADA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
Country/Region  
ALBANIA  
Customer Care Center  
42 27 5755  
Web Site  
CHILE  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
400-810-5858  
CHINA  
ARGENTINE  
ARMENIA  
0800-333-3733  
0-800-05-555  
COLOMBIA  
COSTA RICA  
01-8000112112  
0-800-507-7267  
AUSTRALIA  
1300 362 603  
062 SAMSUNG (062 726  
7864)  
CROATIA  
0810-SAMSUNG(7267864, € www.samsung.com  
0.07/min)  
AUSTRIA  
800-SAMSUNG (800-  
726786)  
CZECH  
REPUBLIC  
AZERBAIJAN  
BAHRAIN  
088-55-55-555  
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis  
Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8  
8000-4726  
BELARUS  
810-800-500-55-500  
02-201-24-18  
DENMARK  
DOMINICA  
ECUADOR  
EGYPT  
70 70 19 70  
1-800-751-2676  
1-800-10-7267  
0800-726786  
0818 717100  
800-6225  
www.samsung.com  
/be (Dutch)  
BELGIUM  
www.samsung.com  
/be_fr (French)  
BOSNIA  
BRAZIL  
05 133 1999  
EIRE  
0800-124-421  
4004-0000  
EL SALVADOR  
ESTONIA  
FINLAND  
800-7267  
BULGARIA  
07001 33 11  
030-6227 515  
   
172  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
FRANCE  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
INDIA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
01 48 63 00 00  
3030 8282  
1800 3000 8282  
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-  
7864 € 0,14/min)  
GERMANY  
GEORGIA  
0800-112-8888  
021-5699-7777  
INDONESIA  
8-800-555-555  
IT and Mobile : 80111-  
IRAN  
021-8255  
SAMSUNG (80111 7267864)  
from land line, local charge/  
from mobile, 210 6897691  
ITALY  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
1-800-234-7267  
0120-327-527  
800-22273  
JAMAICA  
JAPAN  
JORDAN  
GREECE  
Cameras, Camcorders,  
Televisions and Household  
Appliances  
From mobile and fixed  
2106293100  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
(GSM:7799)  
KAZAKHSTAN  
GUATEMALA  
HONDURAS  
1-800-299-0013  
800-27919267  
(852) 3698-4698  
KOSOVO  
+381 0113216899  
183-2255  
KUWAIT  
www.samsung.com  
/hk  
KYRGYZSTAN  
LATVIA  
00-800-500-55-500  
8000-7267  
HONG KONG  
HUNGARY  
www.samsung.com  
/hk_en/  
LITHUANIA  
LUXEMBURG  
MALAYSIA  
8-800-77777  
261 03 710  
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
1800-88-9999  
173  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
MACEDONIA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
PHILIPPINES  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
023 207 777  
1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
MEXICO  
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
MOLDOVA  
00-800-500-55-500  
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
MONTENEGRO 020 405 888  
02-5805777  
MOROCCO  
NIGERIA  
080 100 2255  
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678) www.samsung.com  
022-607-93-33  
080-SAMSUNG(726-7864)  
POLAND  
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-  
7267864) (€ 0,10/min)  
NETHERLANDS  
NEW ZEALAND  
80820-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
PORTUGAL  
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 www.samsung.com  
786)  
PUERTO RICO  
1-800-682-3180  
NICARAGUA  
NORWAY  
OMAN  
00-1800-5077267  
815-56 480  
08010 SAMSUNG (08010  
726 7864) only from  
landline, local network  
Romtelecom - local tariff /  
RUMANIA  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
800-7267  
021 206 01 10 for landline  
and mobile, normal tariff.  
PANAMA  
PERU  
0-800-777-08  
RUSSIA  
8-800-555-55-55  
SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230  
0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726  
7864)  
SERBIA  
174  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
SINGAPORE  
SLOVAKIA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
U.S.A  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
0-800-502-000  
UKRAINE  
www.samsung.com  
/ua_ru  
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172  
678)  
SPAIN  
UZBEKISTAN  
VENEZUELA  
VIETNAM  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0-800-100-5303  
1 800 588 889  
SWEDEN  
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com  
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, www.samsung.com  
CHF 0.08/min)  
/ch  
SWITZERLAND  
www.samsung.com  
/ch_fr/  
TADJIKISTAN  
TAIWAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0800-329-999  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
THAILAND  
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
TURKEY  
U.A.E  
U.K  
444 77 11  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0330 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
175  
Glossary  
ADF  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the  
product by understanding the terminologies commonly  
used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide.  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will  
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine  
can scan some amount of the paper at once.  
802.11  
AppleTalk  
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)  
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards  
Committee (IEEE 802).  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc  
for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh  
(1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP  
networking.  
802.11b/g/n  
BIT Depth  
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band.  
802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports  
bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally  
suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and  
Bluetooth devices.  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to  
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher  
color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number  
of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes  
impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as  
monochrome or black and white.  
Access point  
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that  
connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local  
area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver  
of WLAN radio signals.  
BMP  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft  
Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple  
graphics file format on that platform.  
   
176  
Glossary  
BOOTP  
Coverage  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to  
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the  
bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on  
them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of  
addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation'  
computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced  
operating system.  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on  
printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper  
has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has  
complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher  
and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.  
CSV  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to  
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it  
is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard  
CCD  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan  
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to  
prevent any damage when you move the machine.  
throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.  
DADF  
Collation  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that  
will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so  
that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When  
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing  
additional copies.  
Default  
Control Panel  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its  
box state, reset, or initialized.  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or  
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in  
front of the machine.  
177  
Glossary  
DHCP  
Dot Matrix Printer  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server  
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration  
parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally,  
information required by the client host to participate on an IP  
network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP  
addresses to client hosts.  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print  
head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact,  
striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a  
typewriter.  
DPI  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for  
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher  
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.  
DIMM  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds  
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing  
data, received fax data.  
DRPD  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line  
to answer several different telephone numbers.  
DLNA  
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows  
devices on a home network to share information with each other  
across the network.  
Duplex  
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so  
that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A  
printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper  
during one print cycle.  
DNS  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information  
associated with domain names in a distributed database on  
networks, such as the Internet.  
178  
Glossary  
Duty Cycle  
Ethernet  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer  
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan  
limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average  
capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For  
example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20  
working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local  
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical  
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control  
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly  
standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN  
technology in use during the 1990s to the present.  
ECM  
EtherTalk  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built  
into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects  
and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are  
sometimes caused by telephone line noise.  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer  
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is  
now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
FDI  
Emulation  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine  
to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card  
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your  
machine.  
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results  
as another.  
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different  
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.  
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior,  
which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model  
of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.  
FTP  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for  
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol  
(such as the Internet or an intranet).  
179  
Glossary  
Fuser Unit  
HDD  
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media.  
It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is  
transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure  
to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is  
why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard  
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded  
data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
IEEE  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an  
international non-profit, professional organization for the  
advancement of technology related to electricity.  
Gateway  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer  
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or  
a network that allows access to another computer or network.  
IEEE 1284  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers  
to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that  
attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).  
Grayscale  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image  
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are  
represented by various shades of gray.  
Intranet  
Halftone  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity,  
and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share  
part of an organization's information or operations with its  
employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible  
service, the internal website.  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of  
dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while  
lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.  
180  
Glossary  
IP address  
IPX/SPX  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use  
in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network  
utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet  
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare  
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services  
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and  
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for  
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this  
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
IPM  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a  
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a  
printer can complete within one minute.  
ISO  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an  
international standard-setting body composed of representatives  
from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial  
and commercial standards.  
IPP  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for  
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and  
so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of  
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and  
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing  
solution than older ones.  
ITU-T  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international  
organization established to standardize and regulate international  
radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include  
standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing  
interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow  
international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates  
telecommunication.  
181  
Glossary  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
LED  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that  
indicates the status of a machine.  
JBIG  
MAC address  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression  
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for  
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be  
used on other images.  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated  
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier  
usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g.,  
00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a  
Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid  
for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used  
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is  
the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the  
World Wide Web.  
MFP  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes  
the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a  
printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.  
LDAP  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking  
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over  
TCP/IP.  
182  
Glossary  
MH  
NetWare  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the  
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax  
machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a  
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to  
efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of  
white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the  
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.  
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
OPC  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual  
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and  
it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape.  
MMR  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method  
recommended by ITU-T T.6.  
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by  
its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since  
it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush,  
cleaning mechanism, and paper.  
Modem  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital  
information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode  
transmitted information.  
Originals  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or  
text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce  
others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.  
MR  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-  
T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is  
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the  
differences are encoded and transmitted.  
183  
Glossary  
OSI  
PDF  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the  
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for  
communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to  
network design that divides the required set of complex functions  
into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are,  
from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport,  
Network, Data Link and Physical.  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format  
developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional  
documents in a device independent and resolution independent  
format.  
PostScript  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming  
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing  
areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.  
PABX  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic  
telephone switching system within a private enterprise.  
Printer Driver  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the  
computer to the printer.  
PCL  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language  
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an  
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL  
has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer,  
and laser printers.  
Print Media  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which  
can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
184  
Glossary  
PPM  
PSTN  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for  
determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages  
a printer can produce in one minute.  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of  
the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on  
industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.  
PRN file  
RADIUS  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with  
the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which  
simplifies many tasks.  
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for  
remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables  
centralized management of authentication data such as usernames  
and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and  
accounting) concept to manage network access.  
Protocol  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing  
endpoints.  
Resolution  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The  
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.  
PS  
SMB  
See PostScript.  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to  
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications  
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-  
process communication mechanism.  
185  
Glossary  
SMTP  
TCP/IP  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail  
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-  
based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are  
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-  
server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the  
server.  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol  
(IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the  
protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks  
run.  
TCR  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each  
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of  
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after  
failed transmissions.  
SSID  
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network  
(WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to  
communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have  
a maximum length of 32 characters.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped  
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from  
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the  
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible  
and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have  
been made by various image processing applications.  
Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to  
determine which part of the address is the network address and  
which part is the host address.  
186  
Glossary  
Toner Cartridge  
URL  
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which  
contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and  
photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper.  
Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat/pressure from the  
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents  
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates  
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the  
domain name where the resource is located.  
USB  
TWAIN  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the  
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and  
peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently  
connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-  
compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be  
initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for  
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.  
Watermark  
UNC Path  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that  
appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were  
first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by  
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,  
currency, and other government documents to discourage  
counterfeiting.  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access  
network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The  
format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional  
directory>  
187  
Glossary  
WEP  
WPS  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE  
802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN.  
WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is  
protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another.  
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a  
wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS,  
you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a  
computer.  
WIA  
XPS  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that  
is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can  
be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-  
compliant scanner.  
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page  
Description Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has  
benefits for portable document and electronic document,  
developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a  
new print path and a vector-based device-independent document  
format.  
WPA  
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless  
(Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the  
security features of WEP.  
WPA-PSK  
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small  
business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in  
the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop  
devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between  
a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.  
188  
Index  
Unix  
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper  
A
address book  
editing  
E
Printing sent fax report automatically 117  
Receiving a fax in the computer  
Receiving faxes in memory  
Easy Printer Manager  
email  
general setup  
email address  
searching  
general setup  
group editing  
group registering  
registering  
receiving in Answering Machine mode 115  
receiving in DRPD mode  
receiving in Fax mode  
using  
receiving in secure mode  
receiving in Tel mode  
storing  
address book setup  
AnyWeb Print  
authorized users  
registering  
emulation  
receiving with ext. telephone  
redialing the last number  
Sending a fax in the computer  
Sending a priority fax  
general setup  
Emulation setup  
entering character  
C
Sending faxes on both sides of paper 113  
F
Changing  
Confirming  
copy  
general setup  
custom setup  
fax feature  
features  
fax  
Adding documents to a reserved fax 111  
machine features  
automatic redialing  
font setting  
Canceling a reserved fax job  
Changing the receive modes  
Delaying a fax transmission  
G
D
general settings  
glossary  
Forwarding a received fax to another  
destination  
direct printing utility  
document box  
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination  
L
general setup  
general setup  
driver installation  
LCD display  
189  
Index  
browsing the machine status 57, 61, 62, 67,  
Reinstallation for USB connected  
scanning  
overlay printing  
create  
Linux  
using SetIP  
delete  
common Linux problems  
print  
Macintosh scanning  
memory/hard drive feature  
driver installation for network connected 24  
P
driver installation for USB cable connected  
N
placing a machine  
adjusting the altitude  
PostScript driver  
troubleshooting  
print  
driver reinstallation for USB cable connected  
network  
driver installation  
Linux  
printer properties  
printing  
Macintosh  
scanning  
UNIX  
general setup  
Print Menu  
unifled driver configurator  
using SetIP  
Windows  
general setup  
print resolution set  
Linux  
Linux scanning  
installing driver over the network  
introducing network programs  
IPv6 configuration  
M
printer preferences  
Linux  
machine information  
machine setup  
machine status  
Macintosh  
SetIP program  
wired network setup  
wireless network setup  
N-up printing  
Printer Status  
general information  
printing  
changing the default print settings  
common Macintosh problems  
Macintosh  
Linux  
driver installation for network connected 22  
Macintosh  
O
driver installation for USB cable connected  
multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
Macintosh  
optional memory  
printing  
Setting up the optional memory  
190  
Index  
printing on both sides of paper  
Macintosh  
Special features  
Storing  
S
printing to a file  
setting as a default machine  
special printer features  
UNIX  
supplies  
Samsung Printer Status  
scan  
general setup  
Scan Assitant  
scan feature  
Scanning  
estimated toner cartridge life  
SyncThru Web Service  
general information  
SyncThru™ Web Service  
using direct printing utility  
printing a document  
Linux  
T
Macintosh  
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant 121  
toner cartridge  
estimated life  
UNIX  
Scanning with SmarThru 4  
printing feature  
handling instructions  
non-Samsung and refilled  
storing  
scanning  
problem  
operating system problems  
problems  
Linux scanning  
Macintosh scanning  
Scanning from image editing program 120  
U
copying problems  
faxing problems  
Scanning from network connected machine  
UNIX  
Scanning to email  
Scanning to FTP/SMB server  
Scanning using the WIA driver  
Scanning with SmarThru Office  
service contact numbers  
SetIP program  
paper feeding problems  
power problems  
driver installation for network connected 25  
printing  
printing problems  
printing quality problems  
scanning problems  
usb  
general setupusb  
USB cable  
driver installation  
R
SmarThru 4  
driver reinstallation  
reports  
SmarThru Office  
using help  
machine information 57, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68,  
191  
Index  
W
watermark  
create  
delete  
edit  
Windows  
common Windows problems  
driver installation for network connected 16  
using SetIP  
wireless  
ad hoc mode  
computer  
control panel  
Infrastructure mode  
installation  
USB cable  
wireless network  
network cable  

Panasonic Cs Ce12gkew User Manual
Philips Mcd716 User Manual
Radio Shack Tad 799 User Manual
Sanyo Ths4232 User Manual
Schumacher Sf 8050 User Manual
Sharp Ux 460 User Manual
Soleus Air Kfthp 12 Id User Manual
Thermo Products 13 Seer User Manual
Toshiba E Studio163 User Manual
Windchaser Products Pacr12 User Manual